WWW.MANUALS.WS
Dear Owner, A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how Your car has thousands of parts and components
you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition which have been designed and manufactured in
WWW.MANUALS.WS
2
Regularly check your vehicle for signs of Important! Note to owners
damage.
For your own protection and longer service life of
Damaged or missing aerodynamic compo-
nents such as spoilers or underside panels WWW.MANUALS.WS
your car, please heed all operating instructions
and special warnings. These special warnings use
In Canada, this manual is also available in French.
To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to:
affect the driving behavior and therefore
the safety alert symbol, followed by the words
must be replaced immediately. Note aux proprietaires
Danger, Warning and Caution. These special
Your car may have all or some of the components warnings contain important messages regarding
described in this manual. your safety and/or the potential for damage to Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de
Should you have difficulty understanding any of your Porsche. Ignoring them could result in seri- ce Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire
the explanations of features or equipment installed ous mechanical failure or even physical injury. ou du:
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
dealer. He/She will be glad to assist you. Also f Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
check with your dealer on other available options create dangerous conditions or defeat safety
or equipment. engineering features built into your car. 5045 Orbitor Drive
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the f Do not misuse your Porsche. Use it safely, and Building #8, Suite 200
driver's side of the vehicle, and right as the pas- consistently with the law, according to the dri- Mississauga, Ontario
senger's side of the vehicle. ving conditions, and the instructions in this ma- Canada L4W 4Y4
nual. Telephone number for customer assistance:
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual
are based on the information available at the time Alteration or misuse of your Porsche could 1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3
of printing. cause accidents and severe or fatal personal
injuries.
It has always been Porsche's policy to continuous-
ly improve its products. Porsche, therefore, re-
serves the right to make changes in design and
specification, and to make additions or improve-
ments in its product without incurring any obliga-
tion to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable
driving in your Porsche.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
3
Porsche and the Environment California Proposition 65 Warning Production
WWW.MANUALS.WS
4
Environmentally friendly vehicles Recycling – Emission control is built in
for a Porsche, this is virtually an
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Modern environmental technology ensures compli-
ance with all emission laws applicable worldwide.
academic question
More than two-thirds of all Porsches ever built are
Innovative engine technology combines high
engine performance and environmental compati-
bility.
It has the following advantages: still running.
The engine diagnosis system electronically
– Rapid “operational readiness” of the catalytic monitors the components and systems that affect
But, just in case recycling is ever necessary,
converters ensures low emissions, even in exhaust gases.
we take the following precautionary
short-trip operation.
measures: This continuous monitoring and fault storage
– Reliable operation and good emission control enables swift, reliable diagnosis and fault detec-
– Utilisation-friendly design.
over a long useful life. tion.
– Identification of materials.
f Please observe the chapter “FUEL ECONOMY” Faults are indicated to the driver by the “Emission
on Page 249. – Use of recyclable materials. control” warning light and display.
– Reusable components designed for simple f Please observe the chapter “EMISSION CONT-
removal. ROL” on Page 76.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
5
Setting and operating vehicle Portable Fuel Containers Engine Exhaust
components when driving
Warning!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Danger!
Portable fuel containers, full or partially
Danger!
Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled.
There is a danger of accident if you set or empty, may leak, causing an explosion, or Engine exhaust fumes have many compo-
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi- result in fire in case of an accident. nents which you can smell. They also contain
gation system, telephone or other equipment carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
f Never carry additional fuel in portable contain-
when driving. and odorless gas.
ers in your vehicle.
This could distract you from the traffic and Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. ness and even death if inhaled.
f Operate the components while driving only if f Never start or let the engine run in an en-
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. closed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for pro-
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
longed periods with the engine on and the car
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
not moving.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
6
Vehicle with SportDesign package
Caution!
Risk of damage. On vehicles with
WWW.MANUALS.WS
SportDesign package, front, rear, and side
member trim are painted and located lower
on the vehicle. Off-road driving can seriously
damage these trim parts.
f When driving off-road, make sure these parts
are not damaged.
f Make sure there is sufficient clearance
between obstacles and the underside of the
vehicle.
f Avoid driving through water.
f Do not use side member trim as a running
board.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
7
Fuel Quality
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using
unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle will operate
properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI),
since the engine's “Electronic Oktane™ knock control“ will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
8
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 11 - 196
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 198 - 232
Maintenance, Car Care 234 - 266
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 268 - 342
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 344 - 357
Index 358 - 367
WWW.MANUALS.WS
9
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
10
Controls, Safety, Instruments
Porsche and the Environment .......................... 4 WWW.MANUALS.WS
Never invite car theft! .................................... 16
Cooling System ............................................73
Fuel .............................................................74
Car Audio Operation/Tips ............................167
Porsche Communication
Keys ............................................................ 17 Odometer.....................................................75 Management (PCM) .....................................170
Central Locking System ................................ 21 Emission Control...........................................76 Fire Extinguisher .........................................171
Porsche Entry & Drive ................................... 24 Multi-Purpose Display ....................................78 Storage......................................................172
Doors .......................................................... 26 Warning Lights and Warning Messages .........106 Cupholder ..................................................176
Alarm System, Ultrasound Passenger Compart- Light Switch ...............................................114 Rear Lid .....................................................178
ment Monitoring System, Inclination Sensor .... 27 Instrument Illumination.................................116 Rear Window ..............................................180
Power Windows ............................................ 29 Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment .........116 Engine Compartment Lid .............................180
Front seats................................................... 32 Turn signal/High Beam/ Loadspace .................................................182
Front seat with memory................................. 33 Headlight Flasher Stalk ................................117 Luggage Compartment Cover ......................183
Easy Entry Function ...................................... 35 Emergency warning lights............................118 Luggage Safety Net ....................................185
Headrests .................................................... 36 Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk ....................119 Ski Bag ......................................................187
Rear Seats ................................................... 37 Cruise Control ............................................122 Roof Transport System................................189
Heated Seats – Front and Rear ...................... 40 Vents .........................................................125 Trailer Coupling ..........................................190
Safety Belts.................................................. 42 Fresh-air intake ...........................................125 Loading Information ....................................191
Child Restraint Anchorages............................ 46 Heated Rear Window ...................................126
Child Restraint Systems ................................ 47 Automatically Controlled
Airbag Systems ............................................ 49 Two-Zone Air Conditioning ...........................127
Steering Wheel ............................................. 51 Automatically Controlled
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ...................... 53 Four-Zone Air Conditioning ...........................131
Interior Mirror ............................................... 55 Parking Heater............................................137
Door Mirrors................................................. 55 Sun Visors..................................................142
Automatic Anti-Dazzle Mirror .......................... 57 Sun Blinds, Rear Side Windows ....................143
Ignition Lock/Steering Lock ........................... 58 Interior Lighting ..........................................144
Starting and Stopping the Engine ................... 60 Door-Surrounding Lighting ...........................146
Parking Brake............................................... 62 Coming Home Function (Off Delay) ...............146
Brakes ......................................................... 63 Sliding/Lifting Roof .....................................147
Instrument Panel USA Models ........................ 68 Parking Aids ...............................................157
Instrument Panel Canada Models.................... 70 Garage Door Opener ...................................162
Oil Temperature Gauge ................................. 72
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Speedometer ............................................... 72
Ashtray ......................................................165
Cigarette Lighter.........................................166
WWW.MANUALS.WS
12 Controls, Safety, Instruments
In the driver's seat... On the road... f When parked, always set the parking brake.
Move the Tiptronic selector lever to “P“.
f Check operation of the horn. f Never drive after you have consumed alcohol
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
or drugs.
On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
controls.To reduce the possibility of injury from f Always have your safety belt fastened. f When emergency repairs become necessary,
the airbag deployment, you should always sit move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the
f Always drive defensively.
back as far from the steering wheel as is prac- emergency flasher and use other warning de-
Expect the unexpected.
tical, while still maintaining full vehicle control. vices to alert other motorists. Do not park or
f Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes. operate the vehicle in areas where the hot ex-
f Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
haust system may come in contact with dry
f Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving
f Buckle your safety belts. grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable ma-
conditions warrant it.
terial.
f Check operation of the foot and parking brake.
f Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in
f Make it a habit to have the engine oil checked
f Check all warning and indicator lights with igni- front of you, depending on traffic, road and
with every fuel filling.
tion on and engine not running. weather conditions.
f Start engine and check all warning displays for f Reduce speed at night and during inclement
warning symbols. weather.
Driving in wet weather requires caution and re-
f Never leave an idling car unattended.
duced speeds, particularly on roads with
f Lock doors from inside, especially with chil- standing water, as the handling characteristics
dren in the car to prevent inadvertent opening of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydro-
of doors from inside or outside. Drive with planing of the tires.
doors locked.
f Always observe speed limits and obey road
signs and traffic laws.
f When tired, get well off the road, stop and take
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the ve-
hicle with engine idling.
Please observe the chapter “ENGINE EX-
HAUST” on Page 6.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 13
Break in hints for the first f Do not participate in motor racing events, Engine oil consumption
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
2,000 miles (3,000 kilometers)
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining opti-
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers.
There may be a slight stiffness in the steering or
During the break-in period oil consumption may be
higher than normal.
mum performance from your new Porsche. other controls during the break-in period which will As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufac- gradually disappear. the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
turing methods, it cannot be completely avoided the engine is operated, the climate and road con-
that the moving parts have to wear in with each Break in brake pads ditions, as well as the amount of dilution and oxi-
other. This wearing-in occurs mainly in the first dation of the lubricant.
2,000 miles (3,000 km). New brake pads and discs have to be “broken in“, f Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
and therefore only attain optimal friction when the fuel filling, add if necessary.
car has covered several hundred miles or km.
Therefore: f Please observe the chapter “ENGINE DATA” on
The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
Page 346.
f Preferably take longer trips. pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
This also applies whenever the brake pads and
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance brake discs are replaced.
driving whenever possible.
f Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops. New tires
f Do not exceed maximum engine speed of New tires do not have maximum traction. They
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute). tend to be slippery.
f Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in f Break in new tires by driving at moderate
Neutral or in gear. speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles/100
f Do not let the engine labor, especially when to 200 km. Longer braking distances must be
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in anticipated.
time (use the most favorable rpm range).
f Never lug the engine in high gear at low
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
14 Controls, Safety, Instruments
1 Filler flap release
2 Rear lid release
WWW.MANUALS.WS3 Power windows
4 Inner door handle
5 Door mirror adjustment
6 Engine compartment lid release
7 Parking brake
8 Diagnostic socket
9 Parking brake release
10 Ignition lock/steering lock
11 Steering wheel adjustment
12 Seat adjustment
13 Instrument lighting knob
14 Light switch
15 Turn signal/high, low beam/headlight flasher
stalk
16 Operating lever for cruise control
17 Rocker switches for Tiptronic
18 Horn
19 Hazard warning light switch
20 Glove compartment
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 15
Never invite car theft! Warning! To protect your vehicle and your possessions
from theft, you should always proceed as fol-
Risk of a serious accident.
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock in-
vites car theft. WWW.MANUALS.WS
The steering column will lock when you re-
move the key while you are driving or as the
lows when leaving your vehicle:
f Close windows.
A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are stan- car is rolling to a stop. You will not be able to
f Close sliding/lifting roof or Panorama Roof
dard equipment in your Porsche. The gong alarm steer the car.
System.
will sound if you open the driver's door while the
f Never remove the key from the steering lock
key is still in the ignition lock. It is your reminder to f Remove ignition key (switch ignition off in vehi-
while you are driving.
pull the key out of the ignition lock and to lock the cles that have Porsche Entry & Drive).
doors.
f Engage steering lock.
Warning! f Lock storage tray between the front seats and
glove compartment.
Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle
may result in serious personal injury and f Remove valuables (e.g. car documents, radio
property damage. control module, telephone, house keys) from
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the the car.
key in the ignition lock, especially if children f Lock doors.
and/or pets are left unattended in the vehi-
cle. They can operate power windows and f Lock the glove compartment.
other controls. If the engine is left running, f Close oddment trays.
they may accidentally engage the shift lever.
f Cover luggage compartment with the luggage
f Always remove the ignition key. compartment cover.
f Always set the parking brake. f Close rear lid and rear window.
f Lock the doors with the key or with the remote
control.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
16 Controls, Safety, Instruments
f Inform your insurance company of any loss or
theft of car keys or if extra or replacement
WWW.MANUALS.WS
keys have been made.
f Remove the ignition key, even if leaving the ve-
hicle only briefly.
Replacement keys
Car keys can only be ordered through an autho-
rized Porsche dealer. Sometimes, this may take a
A - Car key long time. Panic button
B - Release button for key bit
You should therefore always keep a spare key on
your person. Keep it in a safe place (e.g. wallet), In dangerous situations or when one's own safety
Keys but under no circumstances in or on the vehicle. is threatened, it is possible to draw attention to
the situation by triggering an alarm.
Two car keys with integrated remote control are The key codes of new keys have to be “reported”
supplied with your Porsche. The car keys are de- to the vehicle control module by your authorized To trigger an alarm
signed as folding keys. Porsche dealer. All keys belonging to the vehicle
f Press button.
must also be reported again.
These keys operate all the locks on your vehicle. The horn sounds and the emergency flashers
flash.
f Be careful with your car keys: do not part with Note
them except under exceptional circumstances. Third parties can continue to operate the mechan- To stop the alarm
ical locks using the lost key.
f Press button again.
The horn becomes silent and the emergency
Emergency operation – pulling out the 2. Using a pointed object, e.g. a ball-point pen,
ignition key press into opening A beside the ignition lock.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be 3. Turn ignition key counter-clockwise.
pulled out of the ignition lock if the emergency op- 4. Remove ignition key.
eration is performed.
1. Remove the cover (arrow) using the screwdriv-
er from the tool kit.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
18 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Immobilizer
Emergency operation – locking the doors 3. Using the key bit, press red slide control B in
the direction indicated by the arrow.
If the central locking system fails, the doors can
only be locked if the emergency operation is 4. Fit cover A again.
performed. 5. Repeat procedure on the passenger‘s and the
1. Open the passenger‘s door. rear doors.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 19
Unlocking rear lid, rear window and spare Opening the rear window
wheel bracket
f Press button 2 for approx. two seconds.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Briefly press button 2.
Hazard warning light flashes once.
The rear window pops open.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
20 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Central Locking System The vehicle doors can be centrally unlocked or Automatic relocking
locked with the remote control.
Switching on
f Press safety button B again.
WWW.MANUALS.WS The central locking buttons and power
windows are operational.
Note on operation f pull the inside door handle twice to open the
door.
The alarm system, passenger compartment
monitoring system and inclination sensor are You can select various options for automatically
switched on. locking the doors on the multi-purpose display in
In order to prevent the alarm system from being the instrument panel.
triggered, you must switch the ignition on within f Please observe the chapter “DOOR OPENING”
15 seconds of opening the door. on Page 102.
Switching off the alarm system if it is Option 1 (AUTO-LOCK)
triggered
Doors lock automatically when a speed of approx.
f Unlock vehicle doors or 3 mph (6 km/h) is exceeded.
f Switch ignition on.
Option 2
The doors do not lock automatically.
Note on operation
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button and opened by pulling
on the inside door handle twice.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 23
Caution! Locking rear lid, rear window and spare
Risk of being locked out of vehicles with wheel bracket
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Porsche Entry & Drive.
f Close rear lid, rear window and spare wheel
f If the vehicle is locked and access is gained bracket.
through the rear lid or rear window, do not If the car key with remote control is out of
leave the key in the vehicle. range, rear lid, rear window and spare wheel
The vehicle is automatically locked within ap- bracket are locked.
prox. 30 seconds after the rear lid or rear win-
dow is closed. Locking vehicle doors
The vehicle can then be unlocked only with the
second key. f Press button A in the door handle.
The vehicle doors are locked.
If the car key with remote control is out of
Unlocking vehicle doors range, the vehicle doors are locked.
f Grip door handle fully. f Please observe the chapter “LOCKING CONDI-
The vehicle doors will be unlocked. TIONS” on Page 22.
Porsche Entry & Drive f Please observe the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM,
Unlocking rear lid, rear window and spare ULTRASOUND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Porsche Entry & Drive facilitates keyless unlock- wheel bracket MONITORING SYSTEM, INCLINATION SEN-
ing and locking of vehicle doors, rear lid and rear SOR” on Page 27.
window. To use this facility, you need to have only f If you are at the rear section of the vehicle with
the car key with remote control with you. the car key, the rear lid, rear window and spare f Please observe the chapter “SIGNAL” on
wheel bracket are unlocked and can be Page 103.
f Do not expose the car key to a high level of
opened.
electromagnetic radiation, as this could ad-
versely affect Porsche Entry & Drive.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
24 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Immobilizer
Switching off the immobilizer
f Switch ignition on.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Switching on the immobilizer
f Switch ignition off and move control unit to the
left for 2 seconds.
f Please observe the chapter “LOCKING THE
STEERING COLUMN” on Page 59.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 25
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Doors Opening unlocked doors from inside Childproof rear door locks
f Pull inner door handle. Childproof locks are fitted to the rear doors.
Opening unlocked doors from outside The doors cannot be opened from inside once
f Pull door handle. Opening locked doors from inside these locks are engaged.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
26 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Avoiding false alarms Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered
f Always close the sliding/lifting roof and all door
WWW.MANUALS.WS
windows. f Unlock vehicle doors or
f Do not leave a mobile phone switched on in the f Switch ignition on.
glasses case of the roof console.
f Always turn off the alarm system before you at- Function indication
tach a trailer. The inclination sensor could trig-
ger the alarm unintentionally. The locking condition of the vehicle is indicated by
a rapid flashing of the light-emitting diode A on the
driver’s door.
Switching on The light-emitting diode goes out when the vehicle
is unlocked.
f Lock the vehicle.
The alarm system, passenger compartment Passenger compartment monitoring system
monitoring system and inclination sensor are and inclination sensor are switched on
switched on.
f The light-emitting diode flashes for 2 seconds,
f Please observe the chapter “CENTRAL LO- rapidly, then slowly.
A - Light-emitting diode for alarm system
CKING SYSTEM” on Page 21.
Passenger compartment monitoring system
Alarm System, Ultrasound and inclination sensor are switched off
Switching off
Passenger Compartment
f The light-emitting diode flashes rapidly for
Monitoring System, Inclination f Unlock the vehicle.
2 seconds, goes out for 28 seconds and then
Sensor The alarm system, passenger compartment
flashes slowly.
monitoring system and inclination sensor are
f Please observe the chapter “ALARM” on switched off automatically. Fault indication
Page 101.
Note on operation f The light-emitting diode flashes rapidly for
2 seconds, shines for 28 seconds and then
If you unlock the vehicle with the key at the door
flashes slowly.
lock, you must switch the ignition on (ignition lock
position 1) within 15 seconds of opening the door
in order to prevent the alarm system from being
WWW.MANUALS.WS
triggered.
If people or animals are remaining in the locked ve- f In vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, operate
hicle or the vehicle is being transported on a pas- button A in the door handle quickly twice.
senger train or ship, for example, the passenger The doors are locked but can be opened from the
compartment monitoring system and inclination inside:
sensor must be switched off.
1. Pull inner door handle once.
When locked again, the passenger compartment Door lock is unlocked.
monitoring system and inclination sensor are acti-
vated once more. 2. Pull inner door handle again.
Door can be opened.
f Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle
WWW.MANUALS.WS
that the alarm system will be triggered if the
door is opened.
Warning!
Risk of injury when the door windows close.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– With ignition switched on or
– A maximum of 10 minutes with door closed
and ignition key withdrawn, but only until driv-
This applies especially if the windows are
er’s or passenger door is first opened.
closed with the comfort function, because
The one-touch operation for closing the door
with this function the window goes up auto-
windows is available only when the ignition is
matically.
switched on.
f Make sure nobody can be injured when the win-
dows close.
f Always withdraw ignition key when leaving the
vehicle or switch ignition off in vehicles that
have Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the ig-
nition key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Uninformed persons could injure themselves
by operating the power windows.
f In case of danger, immediately release the car A- Power window in driver’s door
B- Power window in passenger’s door
key or the button in the door handle in vehicles C- Safety button
that have Porsche Entry & Drive. D- Left rear power window
E- Right rear power window
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.
Risk of an accident. Opening/closing windows
f Do not put anything on or near the windows
Opening window with the rocker switch
that may interfere with the driver's vision.
f Press rocker switch until the window has
reached the desired position.
Comfort function when unlocking the vehicle f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the windows close.
f Hold the car key in the door lock in the unlock-
ing position until the windows and the f Push the button in the door lock in the locking
Panorama roof system have reached the de- position until the windows and the sliding/lift-
sired position. ing roof or the Panorama roof system have
If you unlock the vehicle with the key at the door reached the desired position.
lock, only the driver’s door is opened. In order to
prevent the alarm system from being triggered, Note on operation
you must switch the ignition on within 15 seconds The comfort function remains available for approx.
of opening the door. 45 seconds after the vehicle has been locked.
Power windows in passenger’s door and rear doors
Comfort function when locking the vehicle
Note on operation
Rocker switches A and B in the driver’s door have Warning!
a two-stage function: Danger of injury. The window will close with
– If the switch in question is pressed or pulled to its full closing force.
the first level, the front window is opened or f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
closed manually. when the windows close.
– If the switch is completely pressed or pulled to
the second level, the front window is opened or f Hold the car key in the door lock in the locking
closed automatically (one-touch operation). position until the windows and the sliding/lift-
ing roof or the Panorama roof system have
reached the desired position.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
30 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Note on operation Storing final position of the door windows Safety Button
If a door window is blocked during closing, it will
stop and open again by several inches.
However, this is not the case if:
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The end positions of the door windows are lost
when the battery is disconnected and reconnect-
ed. The one-touch operation of the windows is dis-
The power windows and the central locking but-
tons for the rear doors can be disabled using safe-
ty button C in the armrest of the driver's door.
– The rocker switch is pressed again within abled.
10 seconds of the window being blocked and f Press the safety button C.
Perform these procedures for all windows:
The power windows and central locking
– The windows are closed using the car key in
1. Close window completely once by pulling rock- buttons on the rear doors are disabled.
the door lock (comfort function).
er switch. The symbol in the switch lights up.
The windows close with their full closing force.
2. Pull rocker switch again. 5. Press the safety C button again.
The upper end position of the window is The power windows and central locking
Warning! buttons on the rear doors are operational.
stored.
Danger of injury. If the rocker switch is
3. Open window completely once by pressing
pressed again within 10 seconds of the
rocker switch.
window being blocked, the window will close
with its full closing force. 4. Press rocker switch again.
The lower end position of the window is stored.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the windows close.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 31
Front seats Seat position
Danger!
The seat may move unexpectedly if you at-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
A correct sitting position is important for safe and
fatigue-free driving. We recommend the following
procedure for adjusting the driver’s seat to suit
tempt to adjust while driving. This could individual requirements:
cause sudden loss of control or personal in-
1. Adjust the seat height to give yourself enough
jury.
headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo-
2. Adjust the seat until, with the accelerator pedal
tion.The backrest locks must be engaged at all
fully depressed, your leg is straight but your
times while the vehicle is in motion.
entire foot still rests on the accelerator pedal.
Safety belts only offer protection when the
3. Grip the top half of the steering wheel. Set the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
backrest angle and steering wheel position so
positioned on the body. Improperly posi-
that your arms are almost outstretched.
tioned safety belts can cause serious person-
However, your shoulders must still rest on the
al injury or death in an accident.
backrest.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or pas-
senger backrests excessively reclined.
4. If necessary, correct the seat fore-and-aft Adjusting the seat
adjustment.
f Porsche recommends the use of L.A.T.C.H. A Front seat height adjustment.
5. Adjust the height of the headrest so that the
(Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children)
upper edge is at eye level or higher. B Rear seat height adjustment.
equipped Porsche child seat
C Fore and aft adjustment.
D Backrest angle adjustment.
E Lumbar support adjustment.
To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the back-
rest curvature is infinitely adjustable in vertical
and horizontal directions for individual pelvis
and spinal column support.
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 33
Storing driver’s seat settings 5. Set the control switch A for the mirror setting
to the passenger’s side.
Storing settings on a person button and a car
key WWW.MANUALS.WS The passenger’s mirror swivels downwards.
6. Adjust the passenger’s mirror to the required
1. Apply the parking brake. setting.
2. Switch ignition on. 7. Briefly press the SET memory button and,
3. Close doors. within 10 seconds, hold down the person but-
ton on which the setting is to be stored until an
4. Make the required adjustments to the seat, acknowledge tone is obtained.
mirror, steering wheel and safety belt.
5. Briefly press the SET memory button and, Storing passenger seat settings
within 10 seconds, hold down one of the per-
son buttons (1, 2 or 3) until an acknowledge 1. Apply the parking brake.
tone is obtained. 2. Switch ignition on.
The settings are now stored on the desired
person button. 3. Adjust seat position and belt height.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
34 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Warning! Switching Easy Entry function on and off
Risk of crushing if persons are behind the
f Press switch A.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
driver's seat when settings are recalled.
Entering the vehicle
Risk of damage if the rear seat bench is folded for-
ward when settings are recalled. When the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat
f Switch off the Easy Entry function if there are moves to the rear.
persons behind the driver's seat or if the rear Once the driver’s door is closed and the ignition
seat bench is folded forward. key is inserted or, in the case of vehicles that have
Porsche Entry & Drive, the ignition is switched on,
the seat and steering wheel move into the stored
position.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 35
Rear seats Adjusting
f Press button B and push the headrest all the
WWW.MANUALS.WS
way down.
f Press button A and, at the same time, pull the
The heights of the headrests for the front seats
and the outer headrests for the rear seats can be
adjusted.
headrest completely out.
Danger!
Installing Improperly positioned headrests can cause
serious personal injury or death in an acci-
Note
dent.
The middle headrest of the rear seat bench must
f Adjust the headrest so that the upper edge of
only be fitted to the middle seat of the rear seat
the headrest is at last at eye level or higher.
backrest.
f Do not drive the vehicle without the headrest in
1. Insert the headrests into the guides.
place and properly adjusted.
2. Press button B and, at the same time, push the
headrest downwards until the desired position
Raising
is reached.
Headrests Install the middle headrest of the rear seat f Push headrest upwards until the desired
bench only on the middle seat and push it down position is reached.
Removing fully. Additionally press button B on the rear seat
headrests.
Front seats
Lowering
f Press button A and, at the same time, com-
pletely remove headrest. f Press button B and, at the same time, push the
headrest downwards until the desired position
is reached.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
36 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Rear Seats On vehicles with automatically controlled
four-zone air conditioning:
The rear seats are divided and can be folded
WWW.MANUALS.WS
forward individually to make the loadspace bigger. Safety button
If the luggage safety net is installed, first set up 4. Pull seat cushion forward (arrow B).
the left seat cushion in a vertical position and fold f f f
the left rear seat backrest forward.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 37
WWW.MANUALS.WS
5. Raise seat cushion vertically. 6. Pull release lever A and fold the backrest 7. Insert mounting hook on the seat cushion in
forward. the eyelet of the backrest (arrow).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
38 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
8. Insert headrest B into the receiver in the seat Positioning rear seats 3. Fold seat cushion forward.
cushion (arrow).
1. Remove the headrests from the seat cushion. 4. Push seat cushion under the backrest.
2. Make sure that the seat belts are not trapped. 5. Press seat cushion downward at the front.
Raise the backrest until it locks with an audible Make sure that the buckles are accessible.
click. 6. Insert the headrests into the backrest.
The red “verification flag” A must be lowered Please observe the chapter “HEADRESTS” on
completely. Page 36.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 39
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
40 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 41
Safety Belts f Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable f The belts must be kept clean or the retractors
objects in or on your clothing, such as eye may not work properly.
Danger!
Always make sure your and your passengers'
WWW.MANUALS.WS
glasses, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause
injury.
Please observe the chapter “CAR CARE IN-
STRUCTIONS” on Page 256.
safety belts are properly fastened while the f Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere f Never bleach or dye safety belts.
with proper positioning of belts.
vehicle is in motion. f Do not allow safety belts to retract until they
Failure to follow safety belt warnings may re- f Belts must not rub against sharp objects or are completely dry after cleaning or this may
sult in serious personal injury or death. damage may occur to the belt. cause damage to the belt.
f For your and your passengers' protection, use f Two occupants should never share the same
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in belt at the same time.
motion.
Care and maintenance
f Use appropriate child restraint systems for all
f Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
small children.
may prevent a secure locking.
Proper wearing of safety belts
f Belts that have been subjected to excessive
f Safety belts must be positioned on the body as stretch forces in an accident must be inspect-
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding ed or replaced to ensure their continued effec-
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts tiveness in restraining you.
can cause serious personal injury in case of an The same applies to belt tensioner systems
accident. which have been triggered. In addition, the an-
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your chor points of the belts should be checked.
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be f If safety belts do not work properly, see your
worn behind your back or under your arm. authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
f For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt f If the belts show damage to webbing, bindings,
should be worn low across the hips. buckles or retractors, they should be replaced
f Pregnant women should position the belt as to ensure safe operation.
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it f Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts
is not pressing against the abdomen. in your vehicle.
f Belts should not be worn twisted.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
42 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Belt tensioner Warning lights and warning
messages
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Depending on the force of a collision, fastened
seat belts are automatically tightened in an acci-
dent.
When the ignition is switched on, a warning light
lights up in the instrument panel to remind you to
fasten your safety belt. In addition, a warning
The belt tensioners are triggered in: message is displayed on the multi-purpose display
– Front and rear impacts in the instrument panel until the tongue of the driv-
er’s safety belt has been inserted into the buckle.
The belt tensioners are not triggered in:
– Side impacts
– Vehicle overturning
Maintenance note
The belt tensioner system can be triggered only
once; the system must be replaced afterwards.
Work may be performed on the belt tensioner
system only by an authorized Porsche dealer.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
triggered.
This does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 43
Note on operation
The belt can be blocked if the vehicle is standing
WWW.MANUALS.WS
at an angle or if the belt is pulled out using a jerk-
ing movement.
f The belt cannot be pulled out while accelerat-
ing and slowing down, when cornering and
when driving uphill.
f Insert the belt tongue into the appropriate
buckle on the inboard side of the seat, until it
locks securely with an audible click.
f Make sure that belts are not trapped or twist-
ed, and that they are not rubbing on sharp edg-
es.
f The horizontal section of the belt should al-
ways fit snugly across the pelvis. Therefore, af-
ter fastening the belt, always pull the diagonal
Fastening the safety belt f Make sure that the belts and buckles fit
part of the belt upwards.
correctly on the rear seat bench.
Pregnant women should position the belt as
f Assume a comfortable sitting position.
low as possible across the pelvis, and ensure
Adjust the backrest of the front seat so that the
that it is not pressing against the abdomen. Releasing the safety belt
belt always rests on your upper body and runs
across the middle of your shoulder. f Pull on the diagonal section of the belt now and f Hold the belt tongue.
again during the journey to ensure that the
f Grasp the belt tongue and pull the belt in a f Press the red button (arrow).
horizontal section remains tight.
slow, continuous motion across your chest and
lap. f Guide belt tongue to the reel.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
44 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Automatic locking retractor
WWW.MANUALS.WS The safety belts for the passenger and rear seats
are equipped with an automatic locking retractor
for securing the child restraint system. When acti-
vated, this retractor allows you to securely fasten
the child restraint system in place so that inadvert-
ent movements will not occur.
The heights of the belt deflectors for the driver’s f Operate rocker switch B in the desired
direction until the optimal belt adjustment is Releasing the safety belt
seat, passenger’s seat and the outer rear seats
can be adjusted. reached. 1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch.
Adjust the height of the safety belt so that it runs f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEAT 2. Then make certain that the belt has fully re-
across the middle of the shoulder, not against the WITH MEMORY” on Page 33. tracted. At this point the automatic locking fea-
neck. ture will be disengaged.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 45
Warning!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
WWW.MANUALS.WS
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-
cumstances are they to be used for adults
safety belts or harnesses. Such use could re-
sult in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not misuse the child restraint anchorages.
Only attach one child seat tether per anchor-
age.
They are not designed to withstand loads im-
posed by adults.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
46 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Child Restraint Systems Danger! Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the The use of a child restraint system in the
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Porsche recommends that all infants and children
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times
child. front passenger seat can result in serious
personal injury or death to the child from an
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with f Follow all child restraint instructions and
airbag deployment.
applicable laws. warnings in this manual.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air-
The use of infant or child restraints is required by bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom-
– When using an infant or child restraint system,
law in all 50 states and the Canadian provinces. mends:
be sure to follow all manufacturer's instruc-
The child restraint system should be one that com-
tions on installation and use. f Do not use a child restraint system in the front
plies with U.S. Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
passenger seat.
Safety Standards 213 and should be secured by a – Infants and small children should never be held
lap belt or lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt or on the lap, nor should they share a safety belt
for child seats equipped with the LATCH sytem with another occupant while the vehicle is in Rearward facing child restraint system:
(Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children, also motion. f Use only in the rear seat. Must not ever be
known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH anchorages. used in the front.
– Children too big for child restraint systems
A statement by the seat manufacturer of compli-
should use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt
ance with this standard can be found on the in- Forward facing child restraint system:
can be used providing it does not cross the
struction label on the restraint and in the instruc-
tion manual provided with the restraint.
face or the neck of the child. f Use only in the rear seat. Must not ever be
used in the front.
– For maximum safety and protection, do not
use a child restraint system in the front passen-
ger seat.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 47
Danger!
LATCH child seat system
The use of a child restraint system in the
Use only a child restraint system with the LATCH
system recommended by Porsche.
WWW.MANUALS.WS front passenger seat can result in serious
personal injury or death to the child from an
These systems have been tested and adjusted to airbag deployment.
the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate To reduce risk of injury from an inflating
child age groups. Other systems have not been airbag in an accident, Porsche strongly
tested and could entail an increased risk of injury. recommends:
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH-compat- f Do not use a child restraint system in the front
ible at your authorized Porsche dealer. passenger seat
f Always observe the separate installation in- f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer for
structions for your child seat. correct Porsche Child Seat availability.
f Porsche recommends the use of a Porsche
Child Seat with Lower Anchorage and Tether
for Children system (LATCH)
WWW.MANUALS.WS
points are engaged correctly.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 49
f Do not add any additional coverings or stickers Airbag maintenance
to the steering wheel or in the area of the pas-
Warning lights and warning
messages
senger airbag and side airbags. Doing so may
WWW.MANUALS.WS
adversely affect the functioning of the airbag Faults are indicated by a warning light on the ta-
In order to ensure long-term functioning, the air-
bag system must be inspected by an authorized
Porsche dealer at the intervals recommended in
system or cause harm to the occupants if the chometer and a message on the instrument
airbag system should deploy. panel’s multi-purpose display. your Maintenance Booklet.
f Do not undertake any wiring for electrical ac- f In the following cases you should immedi- Important information
cessory equipment in the vicinity of the airbag ately consult an authorized Porsche
wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable the air- If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
dealer in order to assure the airbag sys-
bag system or inadvertant inflation. the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
tem is functioning properly:
them to the chapter, “Airbag Systems“, in the
f If the warning light comes on, the airbag sys- – If the warning light does not light up when the owner's manual (safety and disposal rules).
tem should be repaired immediately by your ignition is switched on or
authorized Porsche dealer. Further information on the airbag system can be
– If the warning light does not go out once the found on stickers attached to the sun visors, as
f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving. engine is running or well as on all airbag components.
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
area. – If the warning light appears while driving. For special recommendations on the use of child
restraints:
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
Note AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 106. f Please observe the chapter “CHILD RES-
TRAINT SYSTEMS” on Page 47.
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door
trim) may be disassembled only by an authorized
Porsche dealer. Disposal
When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety f Non-ignited gas alternators, or whole vehicles
instructions must be followed. These instructions or subassemblies with airbag units, must not
can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer. be disposed of as “normal” scrap or waste or
put into any other form of end storage.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be able to
give you details about disposal.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
50 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Horn Steering Wheel Heating
f Press button B to operate the horn.
WWW.MANUALS.WS If the interior temperature in the vehicle is lower
than +54°F (12°C) when the ignition is switched
on, the steering wheel heating is switched on au-
Airbag unit
tomatically.
Airbag unit C is located behind the padded steer- When this happens, the steering wheel adjusts to
ing wheel boss. a temperature of +73°F (23°C).
In conjunction with the safety belts, the “airbag” is If the interior temperature rises above +71°F
a safety system designed to provide the driver and (22°C) when the vehicle is operational, the steer-
passengers with maximum protection from injury ing wheel heating switches off again.
in an accident.
f Please observe the chapter “AIRBAG SYS-
TEMS” on Page 49.
Steering Wheel
Tiptronic rocker switches
The Porsche Tiptronic is a six-speed transmission
and features an “automatic” and a “manual” gear-
shift mode.
You can change temporarily to manual mode using
rocker switches A on the steering wheel.
f Please observe the chapter “TIPTRONIC S” on
Page 198.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 51
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Warning!
Risk of accident. The steering wheel may
WWW.MANUALS.WS
move further than desired if you attempt to
adjust it when driving.
You can lose control of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of
seat memory settings.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.
Adjusting steering wheel height and Adjusting steering wheel height and
longitudinal direction manually longitudinal direction electrically
1. Swivel locking lever A downwards. f Press control switch B in the relevant direction
until the desired setting is reached.
2. Adapt the steering wheel setting to the back-
rest angle and your seat position. Move the The steering wheel setting can be stored in the
steering wheel in the desired direction. seat memory.
3. Swivel locking lever A back until you feel it en- f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEAT
gage. WITH MEMORY” on Page 33.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
52 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel Readiness for operation of multi-
functional steering wheel
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– With ignition switched on and
– With Porsche communication systems
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi-
switched on.
gation system, telephone or other equipment
when driving. f Please observe the operating instructions sup-
This could distract you from the traffic and plied for the Porsche communication systems
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. before operating the function keys.
f Operate the components while driving only if
Note on operation
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
The Porsche communication systems cannot be
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting switched on and off using the multi-functional
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. steering wheel.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 53
Manual tuning
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– Set radio station manually.
Scan titles, radio stations
– Scan titles, radio stations briefly.
Increase the volume of the relevant
communication system
Decrease the volume of the relevant
communication system
Next radio station/title
– Select the next radio station or title.
Last radio station/title
– Select the previous radio station or tit-
le.
Switch off the sound
Function keys Source selection
Steering wheel buttons – lighting
f Please read the operating instructions sup- – Select available audio source. When the light switch is operated, the light switch-
plied for the Porsche communication systems Depending on the equipment in your es on automatically.
before operating the function keys. vehicle, the following sources are avai- Using the buttons on the back of the steering
lable: wheel (arrow), the lighting for the function keys
radio, CDS (single CD player), CDC and the rocker switches can be switched on and
(CD changer). off.
Switching lighting on
f Press button again.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
54 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Warning!
Risk of accident. Vehicles or objects appear
WWW.MANUALS.WS smaller in convex mirrors and further away
than they are in reality.
f Bear this distortion in mind when estimating
the distance of vehicles behind you and when
reversing into a parking space.
f Also make use of the interior mirror for judging
the distance.
Risk of damage to the door mirrors when
washing the vehicle in a car wash.
f Fold in door mirrors before using the car wash.
f f f
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 55
Adjusting mirrors Unfolding door mirrors Automatically swivelling down mirror
glass on the passenger's side
f Please observe the chapter “MIRRORS” on f Switch ignition on.
Page 103. WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Turn control switch to A or C.
f Please observe the chapter “FRONT SEAT
WITH MEMORY” on Page 33.
1. Switch ignition on. Both door mirrors unfold automatically.
f Please observe the chapter “PARKING AIDS”
2. Select A for the driver’s side or C for the If the electrical adjustment facility fails on Page 157.
passenger’s side by turning the control switch.
f Unfold mirrors manually.
3. Move the door mirrors in the appropriate Door mirror heating
direction by tilting the control switch.
The door mirror heater is ready for operation
If the electrical adjustment facility fails when the ignition is switched on.
f Adjust the mirror by pressing on the mirror
face. Switching on
f Turn control switch to B.
Folding in door mirror Both door mirrors are heated.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
56 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Warning! Note on operation
Danger of injury. Electrolyte fluid can The incident light in the area of light sensors G
WWW.MANUALS.WS
emerge from broken mirror glass. This fluid
irritates the skin and eyes.
must not be restricted (e.g. by stickers on the
windshield).
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact Switching off automatic anti-dazzle
with the skin or eyes, immediately rinse it off operation
with clean water.
See a doctor if necessary. f Press button F.
Light-emitting diode E goes out.
Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic
parts, and clothing. Electrolyte fluid can be Note on operation
removed only while it is still wet.
Anti-dazzle operation switches off automatically,
f Clean the affected parts with water. if:
– Reverse gear is engaged or
– Interior lighting and/or
Reading lights at the front are switched on.
E - Light-emitting diodes (LED)
F - Button for automatic anti-dazzle operation Switching on automatic anti-dazzle
G - Light sensors operation
f Press button F.
Automatic Anti-Dazzle Mirror Light-emitting diode E lights up.
Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
mirror measure the incident light. The mirrors au-
tomatically change to anti-dazzle position or revert
to their normal state, depending on the light inten-
sity.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 57
Ignition lock position 0
Note on operation
The vehicle battery would be discharged rapidly if
the ignition key is left inserted.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
58 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Ignition lock position 1 f Do not warm up the engine when stationary. Locking the steering column
Drive off immediately.
Ignition on
f Turn ignition key to position 1.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Avoid high revolutions and full throttle until the
engine has reached operating temperature.
Vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive
The steering column is automatically locked
Ignition is switched on. f If battery output is insufficient, jump leads can when the ignition key is withdrawn from the igni-
be used to start the engine. tion lock.
Note on operation Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY The steering column is automatically unlocked
All electrical equipment can be switched on. STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on when the ignition key is inserted into the ignition
The warning lights light up for a lamp check. Page 323. lock.
f Please observe the chapter “INSTRUMENT PA- Notes on operation Vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive
NEL USA MODELS” on Page 68.
The first operation of the starter is ended The steering column is automatically locked
automatically when the engine starts. when the ignition is switched off and the vehicle is
Ignition lock position 2 If the engine does not start, subsequent starter locked.
operations will not be ended automatically.
Starting engine f To lock intentionally, once the ignition is
When the engine is started, the warning lights
f Operate footbrake. switched off, turn the control unit again to the
must go out. ignition lock position 3 and hold it there for
f Move selector lever to position P or N.
2 seconds.
f Do not press the accelerator pedal. Ignition lock position 3 The steering column is locked.
The engine control module will provide the
Ignition off The steering column is automatically unlocked
correct starting mixture.
by turning the control unit from ignition lock posi-
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2. f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 3. tion 0.
f Do not operate the starter longer than approx.
10 seconds.
If necessary, repeat the starting procedure af-
ter a pause of approx. 10 seconds.
Turn the ignition key to ignition lock position 3
(ignition off) first.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 59
Starting and Stopping the Engine Starting Note on operation
To ensure a good charge condition for the battery
f Please observe the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on f Operate footbrake.
Page 19. WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Move selector lever to position P or N.
and thus its ability to start the engine, all electrical
accessories which are not required should be
f Please observe the chapter “EMISSION switched off when the ignition is switched on and
f Do not press the accelerator pedal.
CONTROL SYSTEM” on Page 254. when engine revolutions are low (in stop and go
The engine control module will provide the
traffic).
correct starting mixture.
Danger!
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2. Starting with auxiliary battery
Risk of poisoning. Exhaust gas contains
colorless and odorless carbon monoxide f Do not operate the starter longer than approx.
10 seconds. If your vehicle is fitted with an additional battery
(CO), which is toxic even in low concentra-
If necessary, repeat the starting procedure af- in the luggage compartment, you have the possi-
tion. Carbon monoxide can cause uncon-
ter a pause of approx. 10 seconds. Turn the ig- bility of starting the engine with the ignition key,
sciousness and even death if inhaled.
nition key back to ignition lock position 3 first. even if the main battery fails.
f Never start or let the engine run in an en-
The first operation of the starter is ended In vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive:
closed, unventilated area. It is not recommend-
ed to sit in your car for prolonged periods with automatically when the engine starts. 1. Remove the Porsche Entry & Drive control unit
the engine on and the car not moving. If the engine does not start, subsequent starter from the ignition lock.
operations will not be ended automatically. Please observe the chapter “REMOVING THE
An unattended vehicle with a running engine
is potentially hazardous. If warning lights f Do not warm up the engine when stationary. CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK” on
Drive off immediately. Page 58.
should come on to indicate improper opera-
tion, they would go unnoticed. Avoid high revolutions and full throttle until the 2. Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock and
engine has reached operating temperature. start the engine as described.
f Never leave the engine idling unattended.
f If battery output is insufficient, jump leads can f Please have the cause of the fault remedied at
Danger of fire. be used to start the engine. an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Do not drive or park your car where combusti- Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY
ble materials, such as dry grass or leaves, STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on
can come into contact with the hot exhaust sy- Page 323.
stem.
f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
the fire department. Do not endanger your life
by attempting to put out the fire. WWW.MANUALS.WS
60 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Stopping Radiator fans
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
f Withdraw the ignition key only when the vehicle
WWW.MANUALS.WS
is stationary, otherwise the steering lock en-
gages and the vehicle cannot be steered.
the car.
Warning!
f Only switch the ignition off when the vehicle
Danger of injury. After the ignition is
comes to a stop as the steering assistance
switched off, the engine compartment and
and brake boost are deactivated when the
coolant temperatures are monitored for ap-
ignition is switched off.
prox. 30 minutes. During this period, and de-
f Always withdraw the ignition key and engage pending on temperature, the radiator fan
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. may continue to run or start to run.
The control unit always remains in the ignition
f Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
lock in vehicles that have Porsche Entry &
gine off and exercise extreme caution.
Drive.
Note on operation
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
left inserted.
Warning!
Danger of injury. Hot engine compartment
components can burn skin on contact.
f Before working on any part in the engine com-
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 61
Applying the parking brake Releasing the parking brake
f Press down firmly on the foot pedal.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The warning light in the instrument panel lights
up.
f Press on the footbrake and pull handle A of the
parking brake.
The warning light and the message disappear.
A message will be displayed on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel if the
parking brake is not released before moving
off.
If the brake is not fully set, the vehicle may roll
without control.
f Move the selector lever to “P“.
f Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and the vehicle is
not moving at all.
Danger!
Parking Brake Risk of serious personal injury or death. A
The parking brake acts on the rear wheels and partially engaged parking brake may allow
serves to secure the car while parked. the vehicle to roll, causing serious personal
injury or death to any person in its path.
f Use the parking brake only after the vehicle
has come to a full stop. f Engage the parking brake fully.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
62 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Parking Brake warning Brakes Note
light USA f Make it a habit to check the operation of your
Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed
Parking Brake warning
light Canada
WWW.MANUALS.WS
brakes before driving.
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to cor-
rode if your car is parked for an extended period.
Keep in mind that the braking distance increases The brakes will tend to “rub“ as a result.
The warning lights will go out after the parking very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph or The nature, extent and effects of corrosion de-
brake is fully released. 100 km/h, for example, it is not twice but four pend on the amount of time the vehicle was
The warning lights are not an indicator that the times longer than 30 mph or 50 km/h. Tire trac- parked, whether road salt or grit was spread and
parking brake is fully applied; it is only intended to tion is also less effective when the roads are wet whether grease-dissolving agents were used in
be a warning to release the parking brake before or slippery. car washes.
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
driving the car. f Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
recommend having the brake system checked by
from the car in front of you.
Caution! experts at an authorized Porsche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 63
Brake system function Brake warning light USA Brake pedal
Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted
hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc
brakes at the front and rear.
WWW.MANUALS.WS Brake warning light
Canada
Warning!
Risk of an accident.
Both circuits function independently. One brake The warning light in the instrument panel lights up. Any obstruction of the brake pedal could in-
circuit operates the front left and rear right wheel A message will be displayed on the multi-purpose crease the stopping distance.
and the other operates the front right and rear left display of the instrument panel if the brake fluid f Always check the movement of the brake pedal
wheel. level is too low, or (if the brake pedal travel has in- before driving and make sure that it is not ob-
creased) one of the two brake circuits has failed. structed by a floor mat or any other object.
If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still op-
erate. However, you will notice an increased pedal A greater braking pressure will be required, stop- f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
travel when you apply the brakes.Failure of one ping distances will be longer and the braking be- into positions that could interfere with the safe
brake circuit will cause the stopping distance to in- havior will change, particularly in curves. operation of your vehicle.
crease. With correctly adjusted brakes and a correctly Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
working brake system, the pedal travel to the floor mats of the correct size including a secur-
Warning! point of brake application should be 1-3/16 in. to ing possibility.
Risk of an accident. In the unlikely event of 1-9/16 in. or 30 to 40 mm. Whenever the brake
hydraulic failure of one brake circuit: pedal travel exceeds this value, have the brake Note
system checked.
f Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in In case one of the two brake circuits fails, in-
that position. A mechanical linkage activates creased pedal travel is required to bring your vehi-
the second circuit, and you will be able to bring cle to a full stop.
the vehicle to a stop.
f After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop,
avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it
towed to the nearest authorized Porsche deal-
er for repair.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
64 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Warning! Brake booster
To avoid overheating and premature wear of
the brakes: WWW.MANUALS.WS
The brake booster assists braking only when
the engine is running.
f Before descending a steep grade, reduce
When the car is moving while the engine is not run-
speed and shift the transmission into a lower
ning, or if the brake booster is defective, more
driving position to control speed.
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring
f Do not “ride the brakes“ by resting your foot on the car to a stop.
the pedal when not intending to apply brake
Moisture, road salt or grit on brakes affects brak-
pressure.
ing. When the vehicle is driven on salted or gritted
f Do not hold the pedal down too long or too of- roads for extended periods, the brakes should be
ten. This could cause the brakes to get hot and washed down thoroughly about every 2 weeks. An
not function properly. automatic carwash facility cannot do this job prop-
erly. Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake ap-
plications.
Warning!
Driving through water may reduce the trac-
tion. Moisture on brakes from road water, car
wash, or a coating of road salt or grit may af-
fect braking efficiency.
f Cautiously apply brakes to test brakes after
being exposed.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 65
Brake wear Brake pads and brake discs New brake pads or linings
New brake pads have to be “broken in“, and there-
subject to wear. The rate at which they wear de-
pends on how the brakes are used.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
to a great extent on the driving style and the con-
ditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed
fore only attain optimal friction when the car has
covered several hundred miles or km.
The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
in actual miles on the road.
f Have the brake system inspected at the inter- pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
vals recommended in your Maintenance Book- The high-performance brake system is designed This also applies whenever the brake pads and
let. for optimal braking effect at all speeds and tem- brake discs are replaced.
peratures.
Brake wear warning light Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient con-
USA ditions (such as temperature and humidity) there-
fore might cause the brakes to squeal.
Brake wear warning light
Canada
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up.
A message will be displayed on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel if the brake pads
are worn, excessively.
f Do not continue to operate the vehicle.
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
or replace the brake pads.
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 106.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
66 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Safety notes! f Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed
grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects. WWW.MANUALS.WS
corrode if your car is parked for an extended
period. The brakes will tend to “rub” as a re-
The brake booster is ready for operation only sult.
while the engine is running. The nature, extent and effects of corrosion de-
If the engine is switched off or there is a defect in pend on the amount of time the vehicle was
the brake booster, much greater force has to be parked, whether road salt or grit was spread
applied to the pedal when braking. and whether grease-dissolving agents were
used in car washes.
f Please observe the chapter “TOWING” on
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired,
Page 340.
we recommend having the brake system
In heavy rain, while driving through water or after checked by experts at an authorized Porsche
leaving a car wash, the braking action may be de- dealer.
layed and increased pressure may be required.
f To relieve the braking system on downhill
f For this reason, keep further back from the ve- stretches, change down to a lower gear in
hicle in front and “dry” the brakes by applying good time to obtain engine braking.
them at intervals. Make sure that following traf- If engine braking is insufficient on steep
fic is not affected. stretches, operate the footbrake at intervals.
Continuous braking overheats the brakes and
After a long drive over salted or gritted roads, a
reduces the braking effect.
coating may form on the brake discs and pads
that significantly reduces friction and thus braking f Please observe the chapter “BRAKE-FLUID LE-
action. VEL” on Page 242.
f Therefore, clean the brake discs and pads ap-
prox. every 2 weeks with a strong jet of water.
The cleaning effect of automatic car washes is
insufficient.
To prevent corrosion of the brake discs, “brake
them dry” before parking the car.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 67
Instrument Panel USA Models Warning and indicator lights on the A Oil temperature gauge
speedometer B Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights on the
tachometer
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Rear fog light indicator light C Clock reset button
D Cooling system temperature gauge
Emission Control warning light Turn signal pilot light, right
E Multi-purpose display
(Check Engine)
Trailer turn signal Indicator light F Digital speedometer,
Airbag warning light Outside temperature,
Clock,
Differential locking indicator light Mileage displays
Safety belt warning light
Brake warning light G Fuel gauge
PSM warning light H Reset button for trip counter display
Fog light indicator light I Speedometer
ABS warning light
Tire pressure warning light J Engine boost pressure display
Turn signal pilot light, left
High beam indicator light
Cruise control readiness
WWW.MANUALS.WS
68 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 69
Instrument Panel Canada Models Warning and indicator lights on the A Oil temperature gauge
speedometer B Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights on the
tachometer
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Rear fog light indicator light C Clock reset button
D Cooling system temperature gauge
Emission Control warning light Turn signal pilot light, right
E Multi-purpose display
(Check Engine)
Trailer turn signal Indicator light F Digital speedometer,
Airbag warning light Outside temperature,
Clock,
Differential locking indicator light
Mileage displays
Safety belt warning light
Brake warning light G Fuel gauge
PSM warning light H Reset button for trip counter display
Fog light indicator light
I Speedometer
ABS warning light
Tire pressure warning light J Engine boost pressure display
Turn signal pilot light, left
High beam indicator light
Cruise control readiness
WWW.MANUALS.WS
70 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 71
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
72 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Engine coolant temperature warning Engine coolant level warning
WWW.MANUALS.WS
A warning message will appear on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel if the engine
coolant temperature is too high.
A warning message will appear on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel if the engine
coolant level is too low.
f Switch engine off and let it cool. f Switch engine off and let it cool.
f Check radiator and air passages in front end of f Top up coolant.
car for obstructions. Please have the cause of the fault remedied at
an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Check coolant level.
Add coolant if necessary. f Please observe the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL”
Please have the fault remedied at an autho- on Page 240.
rized Porsche dealer.
f Please observe the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” Caution!
on Page 240. Risk of engine damage.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 73
Caution!
A shortage of fuel may cause damage to the
WWW.MANUALS.WS emission control system.
f Never drive the tank dry.
f If the warning lights have come on, do not take
turns at high speed.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
74 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
76 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Battery/generator
WWW.MANUALS.WS
A warning message will appear on the multi-pur-
pose display of the instrument panel if the voltage
drops significantly.
f Stop in a safe place and switch off the engine.
Possible causes
– Defect in the battery charging system
– Broken drive belt
Warning!
Risk of accident and risk of engine damage.
A broken drive belt means there is no power
assistance to the steering (more effort is re-
quired to steer) and engine cooling fails.
f Do not continue driving.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
Danger of steering assistance failing during
a long journey in the water if the drive belt
slips.
f If the steering assistance fails, more effort will
be required to steer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 77
Multi-Purpose Display Operation, controls
Warning!
There is a danger of accident if you set or
WWW.MANUALS.WS The multi-purpose display is operated with the
rocker switch at the end of the wiper stalk and the
RESET switch at the bottom of the wiper stalk.
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi-
gation system, telephone or other equipment To move up in the menu
when driving. f Press rocker switch up.
This could distract you from the traffic and
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. To move down in the menu
f Operate the components while driving only if f Press rocker switch down.
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
To call selected menu line
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. f Press RESET switch.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
78 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 79
General information The submenus are listed:
– Speed limit
Range on remaining fuel
The range on remaining fuel is continuously
WWW.MANUALS.WS – Vehicle info
recomputed while driving based on fuel level, – Tire pressure
current consumption and average consumption.
– Settings
Average speed
Note
The displayed values are based on the distance
It is possible to leave the main menu via the BACK
travelled since the last reset to “zero”.
command at any time by confirming the RESET
Note on operation switch.
Switching the ignition off does not reset the Main Menu
measurements. Values can thus be collected over
long periods. Disconnecting the vehicle battery f Operate the rocker switch until the basic
clears the memories. screen MAIN MENU is displayed.
Further on-board computer functions can be dis- f Press RESET switch.
played in the PCM.
Please follow the separate operating instructions
for PCM.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
80 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 81
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Activating/deactivating the limit Vehicle info The following information can be displayed:
f Select LIMIT ACTIVE with the rocker switch. MAIN MENU > VEHICLE INFO – Warnings
All current warnings and messages pertaining
f Press RESET switch. f Select VEHICLE INFO with the rocker switch. to the safety of the vehicle can be displayed.
f Press RESET switch. – Level
The current state of the vehicle's ground clear-
ance can be displayed for vehicles with level
control.
– Locks/reduction
The selected driving programs for Low Range/
High Range can be displayed.
– Average consumption
The average fuel consumption can be
displayed and reset.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
82 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Example: Brake pad warning message Example: Warning message – check side lights Level
Returning to the VEHICLE INFO menu MAIN MENU > VEHICLE INFO > LEVEL
Warnings
f Press RESET switch. The ground clearance of vehicles equipped with
MAIN MENU > VEHICLE INFO > WARNINGS level control is shown in the LEVEL menu.
NO WARNING is displayed if the vehicle is in Caution!
perfect condition. Note on operation
Warning messages indicate possible faults.
Any warning messages are displayed. f The level is set using the rocker switch behind
f Go to an authorized Porsche dealer the selector lever in the center console.
f Select warnings one after the other with the immediately.
rocker switch. f Please observe the chapter “AIR SUSPENSION
WITH LEVEL CONTROL AND HEIGHT ADJUST-
Note on operation MENT” on Page 228.
A small warning symbol appears in the lower multi-
purpose display if warning messages are present Returning to the VEHICLE INFO menu
which are not indicated by a separate warning light f Press RESET switch.
in the instrument panel.
The symbol goes out when the cause of the
warning message has been rectified.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 83
Note on operation
f The driving program is set using the rocker
WWW.MANUALS.WS
switch behind the selector lever in the center
console.
f Please observe the chapter “DRIVING
PROGRAMS FOR ON-ROAD AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING” on Page 206.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
84 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Tire Pressure Danger! f Use only the pressure differences shown in the
TYRE PRESSURE menu or from tyre pressure
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The tire pressure monitoring system continuously
monitors tire pressure and tire temperature on all
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure in-
creases increases risk of a tire failure and re-
messages or warnings when correcting the
tyre pressure.
four wheels and warns the driver when the tire
sulting loss of control. Furthermore, low tire f Tires lose air over time without a tire defect be-
pressure is too low.
pressure increases rate of wear of the affect- ing present. A tire pressure warning will then
The display as well as the settings for tire ed tires. appear in the multi-purpose display
pressure monitoring are done on the multi- Correct the tire pressure.
f When a flat tire has been displayed, immediate-
purpose display in the TYRE PRESSURE menu.
ly stop in a suitable place and check the tires f The tire pressure monitoring system gives a
However the tire pressure must be set manually
for damage. If necessary remedy the damages warning about tyre damages due to insufficient
on the wheel.
with a tire sealant. tyre pressure as well as about a gradual loss
The tire pressures to be monitored for tire type of pressure due to foreign objects.
f Do not by any means continue to drive with
are permanently set in the tire pressure The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot
leaking tires.
monitoring system and cannot be changed. warn you about tyre damages occurring sud-
f Defective tires must be immediately replaced denly (e.g., flat tyre due to sudden external ef-
The driver is solely responsible for filling the tires
by a specialist workshop. fects).
correctly and for selecting in the multi-purpose dis-
Tyre repairs are not permissible under
play. f If a message is displayed, check the tire
any circumstances.
pressure at the next opportunity.
f Sealing the tyre with the tyre sealant is only an
f Before fitting tires approved by Porsche which
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
are not stored in the on-board computer, the
workshop. The maximum permitted speed is
missing information should be supplemented
50 mph (80 km/h).
in the on-board computer.
f Do not drive with tires whose tyre pressure
drops again in a short period of time. In cases
of doubt, have tires checked by a specialist
workshop.
f If the tire pressure monitoring system is defec-
tive (e.g., defective wheel transmitter), contact
a specialist workshop immediately and have
the damages repaired.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The tire pressure will not be monitored by a
defective tire pressure monitoring system.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
possible pressure deviations.
f Use only the pressure differences shown in the
TYRE PRESSURE menu or from tire pressure
messages or warnings when correcting the
tire pressure.
The pressure changes by around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) Example: If the tire pressure display shows
for a temperature change of 50°F (10°C). “–3 psi (–0.2 bar)”, you must increase the tire
pressure by 3 psi (0.2 bar).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
86 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Note
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The spare wheel and collapsible spare wheel do
not contain a wheel transmitter and are not moni-
tored by the tire pressure monitoring system.
The tire pressures for cold tires (68°F/20°C) are
shown in the TYRE PRESSURE menu (filling infor-
mation) during the learning phase.
The required pressure for the spare wheel is al-
ways displayed in the TYRE PRESSURE menu (fill-
ing information).
f Check the tire pressure for the spare wheel
and collapsible spare wheel manually.
Tire pressure monitoring system learning Tire pressure filling information
phase
Tire pressure menu
Each time a wheel is changed, the tire pressure
monitoring system must complete the learning The TYRE PRESSURE menu provides an overview
phase again. The tire pressure monitoring system of the current pressure specifications for the re-
identifies the wheel positions in this process. spective wheel (filling information). The pressure
The current tire pressures will not be available on differences with respect to the required pressure
the multi-purpose display until the learning phase are specified irrespective of the tire temperature.
is complete.
If the wheels have not been learned, the current
Tire pressure monitoring system learning pressures are unavailable.
process The spare wheel is not monitored. The required
f Select tire type and tire size in the menu TYRE pressure is specified in brackets.
PRESSURE > SETTINGS > TYRES.
To make changes to the settings of the tire pres-
The learning process is started. The tire type
sure monitoring system, select SETTINGS in the
and size must be selected even if the settings
TYRE PRESSURE menu.
for the new set of wheels are the same as for
the old wheels.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 87
The following settings made in this menu serve as
the basis on which the tire pressure monitoring
WWW.MANUALS.WS
system determines the correct pressure.
– Tires
Select the type and size of the tires on the
vehicle
– Load
Select the type of loading
– System
Switch tire pressure monitoring on/off
Note on operation
Tire pressure settings Settings can be made only when the vehicle is sta- Tyre type
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS tionary.
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS >
TYRE TYPE
Warning!
The tire type and corresponding tire size are set in
Incomplete entries on the multi-purpose the TYRE TYPE menu.
display affect correct information of
– Summer
warnings and messages.
– All season
f After one of the following actions, the settings
must be updated in the TYRE PRESSURE – Winter
menu:
– All terrain
– Changing a wheel
– Spare wheel
– Filling with tire sealant
– Adding air (after previous warning “Flat tyre”)
f Please observe the chapter “SELECTION AF-
TER WARNING” on Page 95.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
88 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Note on operation Speed limits for tires
f The tire size and type can be found on the tire
WWW.MANUALS.WS
sidewall.
Please observe the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS”
Danger!
Risk of accident due to excessive speed.
on Page 269. This could lead to severe personal injury or
death.
Note
f Always observe the permissible maximum
Before fitting tires approved by Porsche which are speed of the respective tire.
not stored in the multi-purpose display, the
missing information should be supplemented in f Exceeding maximum tire speed could result in
the multi-purpose display. a tire burst, causing lose of control of the ve-
hicle. This could lead to severe personal injury
f Go to an authorized Porsche dealer or death.
Selection of tire sizes for summer tires immediately. Moreover, Porsche recommends obeying all
traffic laws at all times to maintain the safety
Example: Selecting summer tires of yourself and all vehicle occupants.
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS >
TYRE TYPE > SUMMER f Please observe the chapter “EXAMPLE OF IN-
SCRIPTION” on Page 281.
f Select tire type with the rocker switch.
f Press RESET switch.
f Select tire size with the rocker switch
(e.g. 255/55 R 18).
f Press RESET switch.
The menu returns to TYRE PRESSURE > SET-
TINGS and shows the current settings.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 89
Spare wheel Collapsible spare wheel
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Warning!
Risk of accident.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
The spare wheel does not contain a wheel The spare wheel does not contain a wheel
transmitter and is not monitored by the tire transmitter and is not monitored by the tire
pressure monitoring system. pressure monitoring system.
f The spare wheel must be used only over short f The collapsible spare wheel must be used only
distances. over short distances.
f Please observe the chapter “SPARE WHEEL” f Please observe the chapter “COLLAPSIBLE
on Page 299. SPARE WHEEL” on Page 294.
Spare wheel selection f Select SPARE WHEEL with the rocker switch. f Select COLLAPSIBLE WHEEL with the rocker
switch.
f Press RESET switch.
Spare wheel The message SYSTEM NOT ACTIVE, WORK- f Press RESET switch.
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS > SHOP appears after the RESET switch is The required pressure and speed limit for the
TYRE TYPE > SPARE WHEEL pressed. collapsible spare wheel are displayed at first.
The display automatically returns to the TYRE This is followed by the message SYSTEM NOT
This menu lists all possible spare wheel types PRESSURE menu (filling information). ACTIVE, WORKSHOP.
available depending on the equipment of the The required pressure specifications can be
vehicle. A warning appears on the multi-purpose display if
read.
the speed limit of 50 mph (80 km/h) is exceeded.
– Spare wheel f Select BACK. The menu returns to the basic
The reminder SPARE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OP-
– Collapsible spare wheel screen.
ERATION appears each time the ignition is
– Sealing set The reminder SPARE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OP- switched on.
ERATION appears each time the ignition is
f Please observe the chapter “MESSAGE “SPA-
switched on.
RE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OPERATION”” on
f Please observe the chapter “MESSAGE “SPA- Page 96.
RE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OPERATION”” on
Page 96.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
90 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Tire sealant/sealing set Selecting load
f Select type of load with the rocker switch.
Warning!
Risk of accident.
WWW.MANUALS.WS f Press RESET switch. The set load status is
shown.
f Have the tire replaced by a specialist work- Deviations from the required pressure are shown
shop as soon as possible. in the menu TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS (filling
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering information).
speeds. f Correct the pressure according to these spec-
f Do not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph ifications.
(80 km/h).
f Please observe the safety and operating in-
structions on compressor. Load
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS >
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE SEALANT”
LOAD
on Page 288.
The tire pressure must be adjusted according to
f Select SEALING SET with the rocker switch.
the vehicle load.
f Press RESET switch.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU-
The display automatically returns to the
RES, COLD” on Page 350.
TYRE PRESSURE menu (filling information).
– Partial load
f Inflate tires according to the displayed
up to 3 people and 46 lbs. (21 kg) of luggage
pressure differences.
– Full load
A warning appears on the multi-purpose display if
more than 3 people and 46 lbs. (21 kg) of lug-
the speed limit of 50 mph (80 km/h) is exceeded.
gage
SPARE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OPERATION ap-
pears each time the ignition is switched on.
f Please observe the chapter “MESSAGE “SPA-
RE WHEEL OR SEALING SET OPERATION”” on
Page 96.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 91
Switching on tire pressure monitoring
f Select ON with the rocker switch.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Press RESET switch.
The display automatically returns to the menu
TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS.
f Check whether the settings in the menu agree
with the tires mounted on the vehicle. Correct
any incorrect settings before driving the vehi-
cle.
f Select the tire type and tire size in the menu
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS.
System The system will re-learn the wheels only if the “Monitoring off” message
tire type and tire size have been selected. If tire pressure monitoring is deactivated, the mes-
MAIN MENU > TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS >
sage MONITORING OFF appears each time the ig-
SYSTEM Switching off tire pressure monitoring
nition is switched on.
Tire pressure monitoring can be switched on or off f Select OFF with the rocker switch.
in the SYSTEM menu. f The message is displayed for 10 seconds or
f Press RESET switch.
If tire pressure monitoring is switched off, tire f Press RESET switch.
The message MONITORING OFF is displayed
pressures and warnings are not shown. for 10 seconds. The menu then returns to the
Tire pressure information is not available on the basic screen.
tire pressure monitoring screen either.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
92 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Tire pressure warnings and
messages
The tire pressure monitoring system warns about
WWW.MANUALS.WS
loss in pressure in two stages, depending on the
amount of pressure loss:
Stage 1 – Tyre pressure too low message
(3 to 6 psi (0.2 to 0.4 bar) loss in pressure)
Stage 2 – Flat tire warning
(loss in pressure as of 6 psi (0.4 bar))
Warning!
Message indicating tire pressure loss Message indicating tire pressure loss for
Risk of accident. Tire damage may impair
a wheel
road safety. This message indicates a pressure loss of be-
f Stop the vehicle at a suitable location if there tween 3 and 6 psi (0.2 and 0.4 bar) if the wheel The system has identified the wheel positions. The
is a tire pressure warning or tire pressure mes- positions have not been identified. deviation from the required pressure is displayed
sage. Check the tires for signs of damage and for the corresponding wheel.
This message appears when the vehicle is station-
fill or change them if necessary. This message indicates a pressure loss of be-
ary and the ignition is switched on again.
tween 3 and 6 psi (0.2 and 0.4 bar).
Example: If the tire pressure display shows f The message is displayed for 10 seconds or
This message appears when the vehicle is station-
“– 3 psi”, you must increase the tire pressure by f Press RESET switch. ary and the ignition is switched on again.
3 psi.
Note on operation f The message is displayed for 10 seconds or
Tires can lose air over time without a tire defect
being present. The tire pressure monitoring sys- f Correct the tire pressure at the next opportuni- f Press RESET switch.
tem will then issue a corresponding message or ty. When correcting the tire pressure, add only
warning. Note on operation
the pressure differences shown in the "Tyre
pressure" menu. f Correct the tire pressure at the next opportuni-
f Correct the tire pressure.
ty. When correcting the tire pressure, add only
the pressure differences shown in the "Tyre
pressure" menu.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 93
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Message indicating a flat tire while the Message indicating a flat tire after the
system is learning learning phase has been completed
This warning message indicates a flat tire with a This warning message indicates a flat tire with a
pressure loss of at least 6 psi (0.4 bar). pressure loss of at least 6 psi (0.4 bar).
The system has not identified the wheel positions The system has identified the wheel positions. The
yet; the tire pressures are not displayed. deviation from the required pressure is displayed
for the corresponding wheel.
This warning cannot be acknowledged.
This warning cannot be acknowledged.
f Stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Check the
tires for signs of damage and change them if f Stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Check the
necessary. tires for signs of damage and change them if
necessary.
When the vehicle is stationary, the screen changes
to SELECTION AFTER WARNING. When the vehicle is stationary, the screen changes
to SELECTION AFTER WARNING.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
94 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Adding air Sealing set
f After inflating the wheel in question, select f After repairing the flat with the tire sealant, se-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
ADD AIR.
The display returns to the basic screen after
lect menu item SEALING SET.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE SEALANT”
acknowledgement.
on Page 288.
For vehicles without air suspension
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE SEALANT/
f Please observe the chapter “REDUCING FIL- SEALING SET” on Page 91.
LING PRESSURE ON VEHICLES WITHOUT AIR
The display returns to the basic screen after se-
SUSPENSION” on Page 296.
lecting SEALING SET.
For vehicles with air suspension A warning appears on the multi-purpose display if
the speed limit of 50 mph (80 km/h) is exceeded.
f Please observe the chapter “REDUCING TIRE
Selection after warning PRESSURE ON VEHICLES WITH AIR SUSPENSI- Note on operation
ON” on Page 298.
When the vehicle is stationary after a tire pressure If you make a selection without performing the
warning, the screen changes to SELECTION AF- Wheel change action described in the selection, the message
TER WARNING. CAUTION – FLAT TYRE – CHECK TYRES will
f For changing a wheel, select menu item
appear again.
f In the menu, select the task performed. WHEEL CHANGE.
The display returns to the SPARE WHEEL menu f Check the tires for signs of damage and fill or
after acknowledgement. change them if necessary.
f Select spare wheel type.
f Please observe the chapter “SPARE WHEEL”
on Page 90.
f Please observe the chapter “LIFTING THE VE-
HICLE WITH A JACK” on Page 290.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 95
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Warning “When vehicle stops, Wheel change message Message “Spare wheel or sealing set
Hit selection” operation”
The WHEEL CHANGE? message CHECK
If you drive off after changing a wheel or inflating SETTINGS appears after a wheel change, if the The message SPARE WHEEL OR SEALING SET
the tires and neglect to make a selection in the tire type and tire size of the new tires have not OPERATION? appears after switching on the igni-
screen SELECTION AFTER WARNING, the following been set in the TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS tion if a spare wheel type (spare wheel, collapsible
message will appear: menu. spare wheel, or sealing set) was set.
WHEN VEHICLE STOPS, HIT SELECTION.
When the vehicle is stationary, the display f Select YES or NO with the rocker switch.
f The next time you stop the vehicle, perform changes to SELECTION AFTER WARNING.
f Press RESET switch.
the settings in the “Selection after warning”.
f Please observe the chapter “SELECTION
AFTER WARNING” on Page 95.
f Select WHEEL CHANGE. The menu automati-
cally changes to TYRE TYPE.
f Select the appropriate tire type and tire size.
Only if the tire type and size are selected will
the tire pressure monitoring system re-learn
the tires.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
96 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Yes: No monitoring Tire pressure monitoring warning
– In case of sealing-set operation, the menu light
changes directly to the basic screen. All
settings are retained.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
In the event of faults the tire pressure monitoring
cannot monitor the tire pressure.
The warning light on the instrument panel and a
All warnings and messages in the tire pressure
monitoring system are also indicated by the
– If the vehicle is operated with a collapsible message on the multi-purpose display light up. warning light in the instrument panel.
spare wheel or spare wheel, the warning mes- The warning light goes out as soon as all faults are
Monitoring is not active when: remedied.
sage “SYSTEM NOT ACTIVE, WORKSHOP” is
initially displayed for 10 seconds. The system – the tire pressure monitoring system is faulty,
then returns to the basic screen.
– wheel transmitters for the tire pressure
No: monitoring system are not present,
The display automatically returns to the menu – temporarily after changing a wheel,
TYRE PRESSURE > SETTINGS. – has detected too many wheel transmitters,
f Set the mounted tire set with tire type and tire – there is external interference by other radio
size. The system will re-learn the tires. sources, e.g., wireless headphones,
– Tire temperatures are too high.
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 106.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 97
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for a temperature change
of 50°F (10°C).
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > CLOCK f Select 12 h MODE with the rocker switch.
The following functions can be selected in the To set the clock: f Press RESET switch.
main menu SETTINGS:
f Select time with the rocker switch. Note on operation
– Clock
f Press RESET switch. There is also a button on the instrument panel to
– Compass call the CLOCK menu.
f Select the hours or minutes display with the
– Comfort (only with vehicle stationary) rocker switch. f Please observe the chapter “CLOCK” on
Page 99.
– Lights (only with vehicle stationary) f Press RESET switch.
– Units (only with vehicle stationary) f Set the time in increments of 1 h or 1 min.
– Language (only with vehicle stationary) f Press RESET switch.
– Factory settings (only with vehicle stationary)
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 99
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Compass
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMPASS
If you drive your vehicle across the magnetic field
zone set on the multi-purpose display, you must Calibrating
enter your current zone in the COMPASS menu
(see illustration). In rare cases, external disturbances may necessi-
tate calibration of the compass. The warning mes-
f Enter the corresponding zone in increments of sage “CAL.” appears on the multi-purpose display.
1 using the rocker switch.
f To calibrate the compass, follow the displayed
f Press RESET switch. instructions DRIVE IN A FULL CIRCLE.
The display returns to the basic screen after
successful calibration.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
100 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > ALARM The alarm is triggered if motion is detected in the
interior with the doors closed (e.g. if a window is
The COMFORT menu offers the following The passenger compartment monitoring system
broken in a theft).
submenus: and the inclination sensor (protection against
towing) can be temporarily deactivated in the f Select INTERIOR with the rocker switch.
– Alarm ALARM menu.
f Press RESET switch.
– Door opening When locked again, the ultrasound passenger
This activates/deactivates passenger com-
compartment monitoring system and inclination
– Mirrors partment monitoring.
sensor are activated once more.
f Select the entry with the rocker switch. f Please observe the chapter “COMFORT FUNC- Inclination
f Press RESET switch. TION WHEN UNLOCKING THE VEHICLE” on The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is raised mark-
Page 30. edly at one end with the doors closed (e.g. theft
Note on operation f Please observe the chapter “TEMPORARILY attempt by towing).
Comfort settings can be made only when the vehi- SWITCHING OFF ULTRASOUND PASSENGER f Select ANGLE with the rocker switch.
cle is stationary. COMPARTMENT MONITORING SYSTEM AND
INCLINATION SENSOR” on Page 28. f Press RESET switch.
This activates/deactivates the inclination func-
WWW.MANUALS.WS tion.
All
All doors are unlocked.
Tailgate
When the TAILGATE function is active, rear access
(rear lid, rear window and spare wheel bracket) is
included in the central locking system.
Access is possible when the vehicle is stationary
Door opening Doors and unlocked.
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > DOOR MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > DOOR At speeds higher than 4 mph (6 km/h), release is
OPENING OPENING > DOORS blocked until, with the vehicle stationary:
Locking and unlocking of the doors and the form Door unlocking can be set on an individual basis. – A door is opened or
of response when the vehicle is locked can be set
individually and stored on the respective radio re- Single door – The button in the driver's door is pulled.
mote control. To do this: Only the driver's door is unlocked. When the TAILGATE function is deactivated, ac-
1. Select the desired setting with the rocker The door of the access side is unlocked in cess is possible only:
switch. vehicles equipped with Porsche Entry & Drive. – Using the button in the driver's door or
2. Press RESET switch. – With button 2 of the remote control.
3. Switch ignition off.
4. Close the driver's door.
5. Lock the vehicle with the radio remote control
(button 1).
The settings are now stored on this radio re-
mote control.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
102 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Auto lock
Note on operation
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button and opened by pulling
on the inside door handle twice.
f Please observe the chapter “UNLOCKING” on
Page 22.
Auto unlock
Signal Mirrors
When the AUTO UNLOCK function is active, the
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > DOOR MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > COMFORT > MIRRORS
doors unlock automatically when the ignition key is
OPENING > SIGNAL
withdrawn (or when the ignition is switched off in When this function is active, the mirrors move
vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry & Drive). Opening of the doors is confirmed by the emer- simultaneously and in the same direction.
gency flashers flashing or by a horn signal.
f Select SYNCHRONISING with the rocker
f Select type of signal with the rocker switch. switch.
f Press RESET switch. f Press RESET switch.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 103
f Select the desired item with the rocker switch
and the RESET switch.
Lighting Units
MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > LIGHTS MAIN MENU > SETTINGS > UNITS
You can set the duration the headlights remain on The UNITS menu offers the following options:
after the vehicle is locked.
– Speedometer
f Select OFF DELAY with the rocker switch. Select unit for speedometer:
mph, km/h
f Press RESET switch. The set coming home
time is active. – Consumption
Select unit for fuel consumption:
f Select time with the rocker switch and press
l/100km, mpg (USA), mpg (UK), km/l
the RESET switch.
– Temperature
f You can use the rocker switch to set an off-de-
Select unit for temperature: °C, °F
lay time (Coming Home function) ranging from
15 to 90 seconds. The time is set in incre- – Tire pressure
ments of 15 seconds. Select unit for pressure: bar, psi
f Press RESET switch.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
104 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 105
Warning Lights and Warning Messages
System fault – Workshop Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Key not recognised in vehicle Make sure that you have the remote control with you.
Move the steering wheel Turn the steering wheel so that the steering wheel lock can
engage/disengage.
Key not found Make sure that you have the remote control with you.
Switch selector lever to position “P”. The vehicle could roll away. The ignition key can be withdrawn
only in selector lever position P.
Move selector lever to position The vehicle can be started only in position “P” or “N”.
“P” or “N”
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Check right cornering light Check bulb.
Check headlight beam adjustment Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Daytime driving lights off Daytime driving lights switch off when the engine is shut off.
Switch on lights if necessary.
Warning – Flat tire – Check tires Stop in a suitable place and check the tires. Change wheel if
necessary.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Tire pressure too low – Add air System detects a pressure loss of at least 2,9 psi/0,2 bar.
Correct tire pressure at the next opportunity.
System not active Indication when spare wheel or collapsible spare wheel is used
or tire pressure monitoring system is faulty.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Select new set of wheels in the Tire pressure menu after chang-
ing the wheels.
System not active – Brief disturbance External interference of excessive temperature at the wheel
transmitters. System will reactivate itself.
System not active – Tire pressure monitoring system detects more than 4 wheel
Too many wheel transmitters transmitters.
(winter wheels in the luggage compartment, for example)
Tire pressure monitoring system will reactivate itself after the
additional wheel transmitters have been removed.
No monitoring – System learning After the tire type and size are selected in the tire pressure
menu, the system re-learns the tires.
Wheel change? Check settings Display after a wheel change without changed settings in the tire
pressure menu. Select tire type and size.
When vehicle stops: Hit selection Displayed after a flat tire if the system was not informed about
the work performed.
Make a selection on the multi-purpose display when the vehicle
is stationary.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Engine temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool.
Check coolant level. Add coolant if necessary.
Please refuel
Oil level monitoring – Failure – Workshop Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Oil pressure too low Immediately stop in a suitable place and switch engine off.
Do not continue driving.
Check engine oil level. Add oil if necessary.
Do not continue driving if the warning light comes on even when
the oil level is correct. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Service now
WWW.MANUALS.WS Service indicator
Have your vehicle serviced at an authorized Porsche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Brake pads – Workshop Have the brake pads replaced at an authorized Porsche dealer
without delay.
Warning – Brake circuit division Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
ABS failure – Workshop Drive carefully. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
PSM failure – Workshop Drive carefully. Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Warning – Brake fluid level Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
PHC failure The Hillholder and the Porsche Down-Hill Assistant are not avail-
able.
Brake booster faulty Greater braking pedal force necessary. Drive carefully to the
nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Spare wheel filling Collapsible spare wheel being filled with level-control
compressor.
Do not drive off!
Control off Level control has been switched off (to jack up the vehicle).
Not permissible The prerequisites for setting the desired level have not been
met.
Warning - off-road anti-roll bar The anti-roll bar cannot be engaged; the system is faulty. Drive
carefully to the nearest workshop. Have the fault remediesd at
an authorized Porsche dealer as soon as possible.
Off-road anti-roll bar faulty The anti-roll bar cannot be disengaged. Have the fault reme-
diesd at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Off-road anti-roll bar disengaged, The anti-roll bars cannot be disengaged. Have the fault reme-
max. 30 mph (50 km/h) diesd at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Not permissible The prerequisites for disengaging the anti-roll bars have not
been met.
Only possible with reduction Disengagement of the anti-roll bars is only possible with
Low Range engaged.
All-wheel drive system faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Shifting not possible, When changing between Low Range and High Range, the limit
Speed too high speed (off-road shifting) must not be exceeded.
Possible only in neutral with brake The vehicle must be stationary, the footbrake must be applied
applied and the selector lever must be in position N when changing
between Low Range and High Range.
Warning – Parking lock! Do not continue driving. Apply the parking brake.
Operate footbrake. Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 111
Instrument Multi-purpose Text display Meaning/measures
panel display
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Spare wheel not locked.
Lock spare wheel bracket properly.
Hood open
All unlocked doors and lids are displayed when the vehicle
exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
112 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 113
Note on operation
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
WWW.MANUALS.WS opened while the lights (not the parking light) are
on, an acoustic signal (gong) warns of possible
battery discharge.
In some countries, differences are possible
due to provisions of law.
Light switch with driving light assistant Light switch without driving light assistant
WWW.MANUALS.WS
114 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Automatic driving light assistant Warning! Bi-Xenon main headlights with
Risk of accident due to driving without lights. dynamically controlled cornering light
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The driving light assistant is a comfort function.
Your Porsche’s driving light (low beam) is switched
on and off automatically, irrespective of the ambi-
f Always carefully monitor the automatic driving The Bi-Xenon main headlights are equipped with
an additional light in vehicles with a cornering
light control.
ent brightness. light. As a result of its particular positioning, the
Highway function additional light provides significantly better lane
Despite possible support by the driving light assis-
lighting to the left and right of the main light beam.
tant, it is the responsibility of the driver to switch The light is switched on at speeds of over 87 mph
on the driving light using the conventional light (140 km/h). If you are travelling slower than 40
switch in accordance with the relevant national mph (65 km/h), the driving light is switched off af-
regulations. ter a delay of approx. 2 minutes, if the external
Activating the headlights using the driving light as- lighting conditions permit.
sistant does not therefore absolve the driver
of responsibility for the correct operation of the Rain function
driving light. The driving light is switched on after five seconds
The low beam is switched on automatically in the of continuous wiper operation.
following situations: The driving light is switched off approx. 4 minutes
– Dusk after the wipers have stopped.
– Darkness
– Travelling through tunnels
– Rain
– Highway driving
Note on operation
Fog is not recognised.
f In the event of fog, the driving light must be
switched on manually.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 115
Automatic Headlight Beam
Adjustment
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature
automatic headlight beam adjustment.
When the ignition is switched on, the level of the
headlight beam automatically changes in accor-
dance with the vehicle load. The level of the head-
light beam is automatically kept constant during
acceleration and braking.
Checking operation
1. Switch the low beam on.
2. Switch ignition on.
The light beam first dips all the way down and
is then adapted to the vehicle load.
A - Instrument lighting knob If this test point not satisfied, the headlight level-
ling adjustment must be checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Instrument Illumination
When the light is switched on, the brightness of
the instrument illumination can be adjusted by
turning thumb wheel A.
f Please observe the chapter “A - BUTTON FOR
DIMMING THE COMFORT LIGHTING” on
Page 146.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
116 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Note on operation
When the high beam is switched on or the head-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
light flasher is operated, the blue indicator light on
the speedometer is lit.
Parking light
The parking light can only be switched on when
the ignition is switched off.
f Move the lever up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 117
Warning!
Risk of an accident.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency re-
pairs, move the car well off the road. Switch on
the emergency flasher and mark the car with
road flares or other warning devices.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone approach-
ing from the rear may not realize your vehicle
is stopped and cause a collision.
Danger of fire.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
er flammable material.
Hot engine compartment components can
Emergency warning lights burn skin on contact.
f Before working on any part in the engine com-
The emergency flasher is ready for use regardless partment, turn the engine off and let it cool
of the ignition lock position. down sufficiently.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
118 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk f Always switch the windscreen wipers off (posi-
tion 0) before opening the engine compart-
Warning!
Danger of injury when the windshield wipers
WWW.MANUALS.WS
ment lid. If the wiper arms are not in position
0, they will automatically move to this position
when the engine compartment lid is opened.
operate unintentionally. This will happen even if the ignition is off.
Risk of damage to the engine compartment The wiper arms remain in this position until the
lid, windshield and wiper system. lid is closed and the wiper system is switched.
f Only wipe the windshield when sufficiently wet,
otherwise it could be scratched.
f Loosen frozen wiper blades before driving off.
f Do not operate headlight washer when it is
frozen.
f Always switch off windshield wipers in car
wash to prevent them wiping unintentionally
(rain sensor operation).
0 – Windshield wipers off
f Do not operate headlight washer in car wash- 1 – Front windshield wiper – rain sensor op-
es. eration
f Always switch off windshield wipers before f Move wiper stalk upwards to the first click.
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional
Notes on operation
operation (rain sensor operation).
The amount of rain or snow which has settled on
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when re-
the windshield is measured. Wiper speed is auto-
placing the wiper blade.
matically adjusted accordingly.
f f f
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 119
Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor 5 – Front windscreen wipers and washer
system
Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages:
f Pull wiper stalk towards the steering wheel.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Adjust switch A upwards –
high sensitivity.
The washer system sprays and wipes while the
lever is pulled towards the steering wheel.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
windscreen. wipes are executed.
Headlight washer (on vehicles with Bi-Xe-
f Adjust switch A downwards –
non headlights):
low sensitivity.
The washer sprays only while low beam or high
2 – Front windscreen wiper – slow beam is switched on.
f Move wiper stalk upwards to the second click. To activate the headlight washer system, the
wiper lever must be pulled for a longer period
3 – Front windscreen wiper – fast
f Move wiper stalk upwards to the third click.
of time.
The spray duration is limited.
At speeds of less than approx. ca. 2.5 mph (4 km/
h), rain sensor operation mode is automatically Maintenance note
WWW.MANUALS.WS
120 Controls, Safety, Instruments
6 – Rear window wiper – intermittent Maintenance note
operation
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
f Move wiper stalk forwards to the first click.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The rear window wiper wipes at preset inter-
result of the following:
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
vals.
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield.
7 – Rear window wiper – one-touch
These residues can only be removed using a
operation
special cleaning solution.
f Push wiper stalk forward briefly. The washer
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
system sprays and the rear window wiper goes
for further information.
through three wipe cycles.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
8 – Rear window wiper and washer system
Push wiper stalk forwards as far as it will go. f Replace the damaged wiper blades
The washer system sprays and wipes while the le- immediately.
ver is pulled away from the steering wheel. When
the wiper lever is released, a few drying wipes are
executed.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 121
Warning! Switching cruise control readiness on
Risk of accident in heavy traffic and conse-
f Pull back the operating lever to position 1 until
WWW.MANUALS.WS
quent personal injury, on twisting roads or
under unfavorable road conditions (e.g. win-
it clicks audibly into place.
try or wet conditions, varying road surfaces). Cruise control readiness
f Do not use cruise control under such condi- The green indicator light on the tacho-
tions. meter now indicates readiness.
f Observe all local and national speed limits.
Risk of an accident, personal injury and loss Maintaining and storing speed
of control.
f Bring the car to the desired speed with the ac-
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
celerator.
spokes while driving.
f Press button A.
The desired speed has now been stored.
Cruise Control
Cruise control maintains any selected speed be-
tween 25 and 124 mph (40 - 200 km/h) without
your having to use the accelerator.
The cruise control is operated with the operating
lever on the steering wheel.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
122 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Accelerating (e.g. to overtake) Decelerating Interrupting cruise control operation
Option 1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Increase the speed as usual with the accelera-
Option 1
f Push operating lever down into position 4 until
The speed driven before the interruption remains
stored in the memory.
tor. the desired speed is reached. f Push forward the operating lever to position 2
When you ease off the accelerator, the previ- The speed reached is maintained and stored (it doesn’t engage) or
ously stored value is set again. when the operating lever is released.
f Press brake pedal or
Option 2 Option 2 f Switch selector lever to position N.
f Push operating lever upwards into position 3 f Push operating lever slightly downwards into f Please observe the chapter “TIPTRONIC S” on
until the desired speed is reached. position 4 (a maximum of 10 times). Page 198.
The speed reached is maintained and stored The speed is reduced by 1 mph (2 km/h).
when the operating lever is released. Cruise control operation is interrupted
automatically:
Option 3
– If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
f Push operating lever slightly upwards into po- than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than
sition 3 (a maximum of 10 times). 20 seconds.
The speed is increased by 1 mph (2 km/h).
– If the actual vehicle speed falls by approx.
Note on operation 6 mph (10 km/h) below the set vehicle speed
for longer than 5 seconds (e.g. upward
Cruise control operation is automatically interrupt-
slopes).
ed if the speed is increased by more than approx.
16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than 20 seconds. – If Porsche Stability Management (PSM) inter-
venes for longer than 0.2 seconds.
– If Low Range is switched on.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 123
Resuming the stored speed
f Pull back the operating lever to position 1.
Note on operation
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The stored speed should only be recalled when
traffic conditions and the road surface so permit.
Tip on driving
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by cruise control.
f To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
engine-speed range, therefore, you have to
change down to a lower gear.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
124 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Changing air flow direction Fresh-air intake
f Swivel vent fins B in the desired direction.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Note on operation
In order to ensure unhindered air intake:
f Keep the fresh-air intake between the wind-
shield and the engine compartment lid free
Fresh air or conditioned fresh air can be delivered from snow, ice and leaves.
from all vents depending on the air distribution
setting.
Vents
Opening vents
f Rotate thumb wheel A upward.
Closing vents
f Rotate thumb wheel A downward.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 125
Cover Flap of the Air-Conditioning
Control Panel
WWW.MANUALS.WS Opening the cover flap
f Swivel cover flap on the handle (arrow) down-
wards. Other buttons for operating the air-con-
ditioning system are uncovered.
Sensors
To avoid damaging the air-conditioning system:
f Do not cover the sun sensor on the instrument
panel and temperature sensor E on the front
control panel of the air-conditioning system.
Switching off
f Press button B.
Indicator light in button goes out.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
126 Controls, Safety, Instruments
A- Windshield defroster
B- Heated rear window
C-
WWW.MANUALS.WS D-
E-
AUTO button (automatic mode)
Recirculated air, automatic recirculated air
Temperature sensor
F- Air-conditioning display
G- Air-quantity button, for the left or right side
H- Temperature button, left side
I - Air to windshield
K- Air to central and side vents
L- Air to footwell
M- ECON button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
N- REST button (engine residual heat)
O- Temperature button, right side
f f f
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 127
Automatic mode Setting temperature Setting air quantity
f Press AUTO button C.
Indicator light in button lights up. WWW.MANUALS.WS
Air quantity and distribution are automatically
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
can be adjusted between 61°F and 85°F (16°C
and 29.5°C).
f Push button G up or down to adjust the air
quantity.
The selected air quantity is shown in a bar
controlled and variations are compensated. Recommendation: 72°F (22°C)
display on the display above the button.
f Push temperature button up or down.
Note on operation f Press AUTO button C to return to automatic
Button H: left side of vehicle
If necessary, the automatic system can be manu- mode.
Button O: right side of vehicle
ally influenced. The selected temperature is shown on the If the air quantity was reduced so much that “OFF”
This manual setting is retained until the appropri- display above the button. appears on the display, the outside-air supply is in-
ate function button is pressed again or the AUTO terrupted.
button C is pressed. If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
is operating at maximum cooling or heating pow-
Warning!
Switching MONO function on er. Automatic mode is switched off.
Risk of accident due to impaired vision. If the
The temperature settings for the driver’s side can If the preselected temperature is changed, the air
air quantity is “OFF”, the windows may mist
be accepted for the entire vehicle. quantity blowing out can adjust automatically in au-
up.
tomatic mode.
f Press AUTO button C for 2 seconds.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly f Only select recirculating-air setting for short
The MONO logo appears on the air-condition-
this way. periods.
ing display panel.
f If windows mist up, turn off the recirculating-air
Ending MONO function setting by pressing the circulating-air button
f Press AUTO button C for 2 seconds or briefly and select the function “Defrost wind-
shield“.
f Change the settings in the air-conditioned ar-
eas. f Push button G up (to increase air quantity).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
128 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Defrosting the windshield Switching circulating-air mode on Air to windshield
f Press button A.
Indicator light in button lights up.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Warning!
f Press button I.
The air flows to the windshield.
The air flows to the windshield and the front
side windows. Risk of accident due to hampered vision. Air to central and side vents
The windshield is demisted or defrosted as In circulating-air mode, the windows may
quickly as possible. mist up. f Press button K.
f Only select circulating-air mode for short The air flows from the central and side vents.
Ending the function periods. Vents must be open.
f Press button A again or f If windows mist up, end circulating-air mode by
Press the AUTO button.
Air to footwell
pressing the circulating-air button again and
Switching automatic
selecting the function “Defrost windshield”. f Press button L.
circulating-air mode on The air flows to the footwell.
f Press button D twice.
f Press button A once. Indicator light in button lights up. Ending air distribution functions
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
Indicator light lights up. f Press the relevant button again or
Control of the outside-air supply depends on the inside air is circulated.
the air quality. f Press the AUTO button C.
Note on operation
Note When the air-conditioning compressor is switched
The recommended operating mode is automatic off manually or automatically, circulating-air mode
circulating-air mode. ends after approx. 3 minutes.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 129
ECON mode Information on air-conditioning REST mode
compressor
the air-conditioning compressor is switched off. WWW.MANUALS.WS
The outside air that is flowing in does not dry up if
The air-conditioning compressor:
Using engine residual heat
The residual heat of the engine can be used to
– Can switch off briefly if engine is under an ex- heat the interior up to 20 minutes after the ignition
Warning! treme load to ensure sufficient engine cooling. has been switched off.
Risk of accident due to hampered vision. – Switches off automatically at temperatures be- f Press REST button N.
If the air-conditioning compressor is low approx. 37.4°F (3°C) and cannot be The air-conditioning settings cannot be
switched off, the windows may mist up. switched on, even manually. changed in REST mode.
f Do not switch off the air-conditioning compres- – Operates most effectively with windows
sor in damp weather. Ending the function
closed.
If the car has been in the sun for a long time, f Press REST button N.
Switching air-conditioning compressor off however, it is a good idea to ventilate the
Note on operation
interior briefly with the windows open.
Whenever outside temperatures exceed 37.4°F
(3°C), the air-conditioning compressor is always If the battery positive voltage is too low, REST
Notes on operation mode is automatically ended.
switched on in automatic mode.
The compressor can be switched off to save fuel, Depending on the outside temperature and humid- f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
but control comfort is then limited: ity, condensation can drip from the evaporator AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 106.
and form a pool under the car.
f Press ECON button M. This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
The ECON logo appears on the air-conditioning
display panel. If uncooled air flows out when the lowest temper-
The air-conditioning compressor is switched ature has been set (“LO”), switch off the air-condi-
off. tioning compressor and have the fault remedied at
an authorized Porsche dealer.
Switching air-conditioning compressor on
f If the interior temperature is too high:
Press ECON button M or
Press AUTO button C.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
130 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Control panel for air-conditioned areas –
front and rear
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 131
Control panel for air-conditioned areas at the
rear
WWW.MANUALS.WS C-
F-
AUTO button (automatic mode)
Air-conditioning/seat heating display
G- Air-quantity button, left
H- Temperature button, left; seat heating, left
I - Air to vent, left door post
K- Air to left central vent (center console)
L- Air to footwell, left
O- Air to vent, right door post
P- Air to right central vent (center console right)
Q- Air to footwell, right
R- Temperature button, right; seat heating, right
S- Air-quantity button, right
T- Seat heating off/on
Safety button
f Please observe the chapter “SAFETY BUTTON”
on Page 22.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
132 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Automatic mode Switching MONO function on Setting temperature
The temperature and air quantity settings for the
WWW.MANUALS.WS
You can switch to automatic mode for the front
and rear air-conditioned areas, independently of
driver’s side can be accepted for the entire
vehicle.
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature
for each of the four air-conditioned areas can be
adjusted between 61°F and 85°F (16°C and
one another.
f Press AUTO button C in the front control panel 29.5°C).
f Press AUTO button C on the front or rear for 2 seconds. Recommendation: 72°F (22°C)
control panel. The MONO logo appears on the air-condi-
f Push temperature button up or down.
The indicator light in button C of the front con- tioning display panel.
Button H:
trol panel and the Auto indication in the rear
Ending MONO function Left air-conditioned area at the front or rear.
control panel are lit.
Button R:
Air quantity and distribution are automatically f Press AUTO button C in the front control panel Right air-conditioned area at the front or rear.
controlled and variations are compensated. for 2 seconds or The selected temperature is shown on the
Note on operation f Change the settings in the air-conditioned display above the button.
areas. If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
If necessary, the automatic system can be
manually influenced. is operating at maximum cooling or heating pow-
This setting is retained until the appropriate er.
function button is pressed again or the AUTO If the preselected temperature is changed, the air
button C is pressed. quantity blowing out can adjust automatically in au-
tomatic mode.
The desired temperature is reached more quickly
this way.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 133
Setting air quantity Defrosting the windshield Switching circulating-air mode on
The air quantity can be selected individually for
each of the four air-conditioned areas.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Press button A on the front control panel.
Indicator light lights up. Warning!
The air flows to the windshield and the front
f Push button for air quantity up or down. Risk of accident due to impaired vision.
side windows.
Button G: In recirculating-air mode, the windows may
The windshield is demisted or defrosted as
Left air-conditioned area at the front or rear. fog up.
quickly as possible.
Button S:
Right air-conditioned area at the front or rear. f Only select recirculating-air mode for short
Ending the function periods.
The selected air quantity is shown in a bar
display on the display above the button. f Press button A again or f If windows mist up, end circulating-air mode by
Press the AUTO button.
f Press AUTO button C to return to automatic pressing the circulating-air button again and
mode. selecting the function “Defrost windshield”.
Switching automatic circulating-
If the air quantity on the front control panel was re- air mode on f Press button D on the front control panel
duced so much that “OFF” appears on the display,
f Press button D on the front control panel once. twice.
the outside-air supply is interrupted. Indicator light lights up.
Indicator light lights up.
Control of the outside-air supply depends on The outside-air supply is interrupted and only
Warning! the air quality. the inside air is circulated.
Risk of accident due to impaired vision Note on operation
caused by misted windows. If the air quantity Note
is “OFF”, the windows may mist up. When the air-conditioning compressor is switched
The recommended operating mode is automatic
off manually or automatically, recirculating-air
f Push button G up (to increase air quantity). circulating-air mode.
mode ends after approx. 3 minutes.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
134 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Air to windshield ECON mode Information on air-conditioning
compressor
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 135
REST mode Controlling rear air-conditioned
areas with the front control panel
Using engine residual heat
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Press button M.
Symbol appears on the display.
The residual heat of the engine can be used to The rear air-conditioned areas can be con-
heat the interior up to 20 minutes after the ignition trolled from the front control panel.
has been switched off.
f Press AUTO/REST button C on the front Ending the function
control panel. f Press button M again.
The air-conditioning settings cannot be
changed in REST mode. Note on operation
Note on operation
If the battery positive voltage is too low, REST
mode is automatically ended.
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 106.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
136 Controls, Safety, Instruments
The parking heater is operated using the following
buttons on the front air-conditioning control panel:
A- “–” button
B- TIMER button Danger!
C- ON/OFF button
D- “+” button Risk of poisoning due to carbon monoxide
(CO). The parking heater consumes fuel and
emits exhaust fumes. Exposure to such
Parking Heater fumes can cause unconsciousness, serious
The parking heater features two functions: parking personal injury or death.
heating and parking ventilation. f Switch off the parking heater before refuelling.
The parking heater is ready for use regardless of f Do not operate the parking heater in enclosed
the ignition key position. spaces (e.g. a garage).
The parking heater is also used as an auxiliary
heater. Operation of the parking heater is clearly
audible when outside temperatures are low, even
if the parking heater has been manually switched
off. WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 137
Notes on operation Switching parking heater on and
The parking heater runs on fuel, and it therefore off
cannot be switched on after the reserve warning
lights up.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Switching on
WWW.MANUALS.WS
138 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Programming function
1. Switch ignition off.
WWW.MANUALS.WS 2. Press TIMER button on the front
air-conditioning control panel.
The symbols for the parking heating H or
parking ventilation E function flash on the
display.
3. Select function.
Press “+” button for parking heating
or “–” button for parking ventilation.
If no other entry is made within 10 seconds, the
display returns to its initial status.
However, the selected function is retained and is
activated when the parking heater is next turned
on.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 139
Programming ON times Activating the memory Example:
1. Switch ignition off. The parking heater runs for 30 minutes. It then The parking heater is to activate the parking
2. Press TIMER button. WWW.MANUALS.WS
switches itself off automatically.
The program must be reactivated for every subse-
heating function at 9:48 a.m.
To do this:
3. Select function (parking heating or parking quent run.
1. Switch ignition off.
ventilation). To do this:
2. Press TIMER button B on the front air-condi-
4. Select the memory using TIMER button. 1. Switch ignition off.
tioning control panel.
The desired memory can be selected by
2. Press TIMER button B. The symbols for the parking heating or parking
pressing button several times.
ventilation function flash on the display.
3. Select function (parking heating or parking
5. Set ON time using the “+” and “–” buttons.
ventilation). 3. Press “+” button D.
Pressing the buttons adjusts the time on a
This selects the parking heating function.
minute-by-minute basis. If the button is kept 4. Select the memory using TIMER button. The
depressed, the time is adjusted faster. ON time that was last saved is displayed. 4. Select the memory using TIMER button B.
ON times are only valid for 24 hours.
5. Press ON/OFF button. 5. Set ON time to 9:48 a.m. using the “+” and
6. Press ON/OFF button. The program is reactivated. “–” buttons (A and D).
Displays F and G flash for approx. 10 seconds. Displays F and G flash for approx. 10 seconds.
6. Press ON/OFF button C.
The ON/OFF button can be pressed again to The ON/OFF button can be pressed again to
The parking heater has now been programed
switch off the displays before this time has switch off the displays before this time has
and the selected memory is active.
elapsed. elapsed.
After the ON/OFF button has been pressed, After the ON/OFF button has been pressed, Note on operation
the ON time I, clock symbol F and memory G the ON time I, clock symbol F and memory G
are displayed for 2 minutes. are displayed for 2 minutes. If the parking heater is switched on manually prior
The display then goes out. The display then goes out. to program start of an active memory, this will
The parking heater has now been programed The parking heater has now been programed delete the programming.
and the selected memory is active (symbol G and the selected memory is active (symbol G The memory must be reactivated if it is needed.
is lit). is lit). If the memory is not reactivated, the parking
heater will not switch on.
Note on operation Note on operation
Only one memory can be active at any one time. Only one memory can be active at any one time.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
140 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Parking heater faults
WWW.MANUALS.WS
In the event of faults in the parking heater, no
function symbol appears on the display – only the
remaining running time is shown. The display
flashes on briefly and then goes completely dark.
f Have the parking heater checked at an
authorized Porsche dealer.
In the event of a serious accident, the parking
heater switches off automatically for safety
reasons.
The parking heater is not ready for operation.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
If the temperature rises, the overheating protec-
tion switches the parking heater off automatically.
The parking heater is not ready for operation.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
The parking heater is switched off automatically if
the voltage is too low. The parking heater is
temporarily unavailable.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 141
Note on operation
Please note that sun visor B must be swivelled
WWW.MANUALS.WS
upwards before swivelling back sun visor A.
Otherwise, sun visor B can no longer be swivelled
upwards.
Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Pull out sun blinds during the journey only when
door windows are closed.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 143
Reading lights, front Interior light, front
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Switching on
f Press button A or E.
Switching on
f Move switch C to the left.
Switching off
A, E - Switch for reading lights f Move switch C to center position or
B - Button for dimming the comfort lighting
C - Switch for interior light f Press switch D.
D - Switch for switching off all interior lights All interior lights are switched off.
Interior Lighting
Note on operation
f If the interior lights were switched off with
switch D, switch D must be pressed again be-
fore the interior lights are switched on.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
144 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Switching on and off automatically
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Move toggle switch to center position.
The lights are switched on when a door is un-
locked or opened or when the ignition key is
withdrawn from the ignition lock.The lights are
switched off with a delay of approx.
30 seconds after the door is closed. The light
goes out immediately as soon as the ignition is
switched on or the vehicle is locked.
Switching off
Switching on
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 145
Dimming (adjusting the brightness of) the Coming Home Function (Off Delay)
comfort lighting
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Once the last door is closed, the footwell and door
panel lights are dimmed to the set value.
The following lights remain switched on for a
certain period to allow you to get out of the vehicle
safely and with a better view at dusk or in
darkness:
The comfort lighting is dimmed using button A in
the front roof console. – Lights in the door mirrors
f Hold down button A until the level of brightness – Side marker light
that you require is reached.
– Lincence plate lights.
Door-Surrounding Lighting
Note on operation
The door-surrounding lighting enables passengers f Set light switch to auto.
to enter the vehicle safely. Obstacles on the
ground (e.g. puddles) can be identified more f Please observe the chapter “LIGHT SWITCH”
easily. on Page 114.
The area in front of the vehicle is illuminated with The lights are switched off when the vehicle is
A - Button for dimming the comfort lighting the following lights when the vehicle is unlocked by locked or, at the latest, after the Coming Home
remote control or by Porsche Entry & Drive: light that has been set on the multi-purpose
display has expired.
Comfort Lighting – Low beam
f Please observe the chapter “LIGHTING” on
The footwell and door panel lighting improve your – Lights in the door mirrors Page 104.
orientation inside the vehicle when it is dark.
– Side marker light
These lights are switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked and switched off again automatically – Licence plate lights.
when the vehicle is locked.
The door-surrounding lighting switches off after
the Coming Home light (light that is used during
twilight hours) that has been set on the multi-pur-
pose display has expired or when the ignition is
switched on.
f Please observe the chapter “LIGHTING” on
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Page 104.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 147
A - Closing sliding/lifting roof completely B - Opening sliding/lifting roof to comfort
setting
f Turn knob to switch position A.
Note on operation
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Turn knob to switch position B.
The sliding/lifting roof opens in switch position B
The sliding/lifting roof is equipped with a force until it reaches the best position from the point of
limiter. If the sliding/lifting roof is obstructed view of noise. It can be opened fully, however, if
during the closing process, the sliding/lifting roof you continue to turn the switch beyond the limit to
opens again immediately. position C.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
148 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Emergency operation of sliding/lifting
roof
WWW.MANUALS.WS
If the sliding/lifting roof is defective, this can be
closed or opened manually.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury and damage
to the sliding/lifting roof during emergency
operation.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the sliding/lifting roof is operated.
f During and after emergency operation, the slid-
ing/lifting roof may no longer be operated with
the rocker switch.
1. Open the glasses case in the roof console 3. Remove key B from the lower storage tray (un-
(arrow). derneath the rubber mat) in the center
console.
2. Unclip cover A.
f f f
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 149
5. Hold the key in this position and turn.
To close the roof – turn to the right.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
To open the roof – turn to the left.
6. Remove the key and return it to the storage
tray.
7. Clip in cover.
f Have the fault eliminated at your authorized
Porsche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
150 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Panorama roof system Caution!
Risk of damage when activating the
(available as of 01/05 at the earliest)
The Panorama roof system of your Porsche
WWW.MANUALS.WS Panorama roof system due to improperly
atteched roof elements.
consists of a total of four roof elements.
f Check that the roof elements are securely
Roof element 1 is the draft deflector. This attached before starting to drive.
adjusts itself according to the speed, and helps
f Make sure there is sufficient clearance
protect from the disturbing effects of the wind
between the Panorama roof system and the
when the Panorama roof system is open,
attached roof elements..
especially at high speeds or from turbulent air
flow.
Both roof elements 2 and 3 can be moved by Readiness for operation of the Panorama
activating the knob in the vehicle's longitudinal roof system
direction. Roof element 3 can also be raised. This
allows the interior to be better ventilated. – With ignition switched on.
Roof element 4 is a fixed glass element and – With ignition key withdrawn until door is first
completes the Panorama roof system. opened, but only for a maximum of 10
1- Draft deflector minutes.
2- Sliding roof element
3- Sliding/lifting roof element
4- Fixed glass element Readiness function of the Panorama roof
system switches off after 10 minutes
If the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle electronics
are switched off after 10 minutes to save the
vehicle battery. The roof elements can then no
longer be activated. The power supply is activated
when the ignition is switched on.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 151
Warning! A - Closes Panorama roof system
Risk of injury when operating or automatic- completely
WWW.MANUALS.WS
ally closing the Panorama roof system.
f Turn knob to switch position A.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the Panorama roof system is operated. B - Opens sliding roof element completely
f Always withdraw ignition key when leaving the
vehicle or switch ignition off in vehicles that f Turn knob to switch position B.
have Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the Roof element 2 will be opened completely.
ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle. The roller blind will open automatically to the
Uninformed persons (e.g. children) could injure selected opening width.
themselves by operating the Panorama roof
system. C - Opens Panorama roof system
completely
f In case of danger, operate the knob in the
opposite direction or release the car key f Turn knob beyond the stop position B to switch
immediately. position C.
Roof elements 2 and 3 will be opened
A- Close Panorama roof system completely completely.
B- Open sliding roof element completely
The roller blind will open automatically to the
C- Open Panorama roof system completely
D- Sliding/lifting roof element in lift position selected opening width.
E- Open sliding/lifting roof element completely
D - Raises sliding/lifting roof element
Note on operation
Using the automated presetting system, every f Turn knob to switch position D.
usable roof position can be controlled directly with Roof element 3 will be raised completely. The
the knob. roller blind does not change position here.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
152 Controls, Safety, Instruments
E - Opens sliding/lifting roof element Force limiter for the Panorama roof Save final position of the Panorama roof
completely system system
f Turn knob to switch position E. WWW.MANUALS.WS
All roof elements are equipped with a force limiter.
If the sliding roof or the sliding/lifting roof element
After disconnecting/reconnecting the vehicle
battery or if the vehicle battery is discharged, or
f Roof element 3 will be opened completely.
is obstructed during the closing or opening after emergency starting with jumper cables, the
The roller blind will open automatically to the
process, the respective roof element opens or final positions of the Panorama roof system are
selected opening width.
closes again immediately. lost.
Comfort function when locking/unlocking Closing a roof element after triggering the Warning!
the vehicle force limiter
Risk of injury when closing the Panorama
f Hold the car key in the door lock in the 1. Remove the obstruction. roof system. The force limiter is not available
unlocking or locking position until the windows 2. Turn knob to position A again. and the roof elements will close with full
and the Panorama roof system have reached force.
the desired position.
Electric emergency closing function f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
f On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, keep when the Panorama roof system is closing.
the button in the door lock pressed until the Warning!
windows and the Panorama roof system have 1. Switch ignition off.
Risk of injury from the emergency closing
reached the desired position.
function for the Panorama roof system. The 2. Turn knob to position A.
force limiter is not available and the roof
3. Switch ignition on.
elements will close with full force.
4. Hold knob in position A. The closing process
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
begins after around 5 seconds.
when the Panorama roof system is closing.
Hold the knob in position until the roller blind
and all roof elements are completely closed.
If the roof cannot be closed due to dirt, ice, or
The process lasts approximately 20 seconds.
similar substances:
1. Turn knob to position A. Note on operation
2. Hold the knob in position A until all roof If the procedure is interrupted, saving the final
elements are completely closed. positions must be started from the beginning.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 153
Opening/closing the roller blind Roller blind cleaning position
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The rocker switch has a two-stage function:
– If the rocker switch is pressed to the first
1. Close Panorama roof system and roller blind
completely.
stage, the roller blind opens or closes as long 2. Turn knob to position C. The Panorama roof
as the rocker switch is being pressed. system opens completely.
– If the rocker switch is pressed completely, the 3. When the Panorama roof system has reached
roller blind opens or closes to the final the final position, hold the rocker switch G to
position. the front for longer than 3 seconds, until the
roller blind is completely closed.
Opening the roller blind
4. Remove dirt (e.g., leaves).
f Press rocker switch to the rear F.
5. Keep the rocker switch F pressed to the rear,
Closing the roller blind until the roller blind is completely closed.
f Press rocker switch to the front G. 6. Close sliding roof element.
Note Caution!
Roller blind
If the rocker switch is pressed completely while Risk of damage if the Panorama roof system
A roller blind is integrated into the Panorama roof the roof elements are moving, the roller blind and roller blind are in the roller blind
system and can be adjusted by activating the opens or closes to the final position after the roof cleaning position while driving.
rocker switch in the roof console. elements have reached the selected position.
f Close the Panorama roof system completely
one time before driving off.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
154 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Emergency operation of the Panorama
roof system
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Use emergency operation only under exceptional
circumstances if the electric emergency closing
function cannot be implemented and the end
position cannot be stored.
f Before using emergency operation, please
check whether the fuse is defective. After the
fuse has been changed, the limit positions of
the panorama roof system will have to be
stored again.
Warning!
Risk of injury when closing the roof.
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured
when the roof elements are activated.
1. Remove key B from the lower storage tray 2. Unclip cover.
(underneath the rubber mat) in the center
3. Insert the key in opening H or I until it can be
console.
felt and heard to engage.
This requires a somewhat greater effort.
H – Emergency operation for the sliding roof
element and the draft deflector
I – Emergency operation for the sliding/lifting
roof element
f f f
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 155
4. Hold the key in this position and turn.
To close the roof – turn clockwise
To open the roof – turn counter-clockwise
Note on operation
WWW.MANUALS.WS
When using emergency closing for the sliding/
lifting roof element, make sure that the roof
element is completely closed (center position
between sliding and lifting roof position).
5. Remove the key and return it to the storage
tray.
6. Clip in cover.
f Have the fault eliminated at your authorized
Porsche dealer.
To rule out malfunctions in the system, the final
positions of the Panorama roof system must be
saved again after emergency operation.
f Please observe the chapter “SAVE FINAL
POSITION OF THE PANORAMA ROOF SYSTEM”
on Page 153.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
156 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Parking Aids Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
ParkAssist WWW.MANUALS.WS
ParkAssist cannot detect small objects such
as children and pets.
ParkAssist provides a visual and acoustic indica- Even when using ParkAssist, the driver is still
tion to the driver of the distance between the responsible for taking due care when park-
vehicle and a large obstacle. ing and when assessing obstacles.
ParkAssist is switched on automatically when the f Make sure that no persons especially small
engine is started and remains active up to a speed children, animals or obstacles are within the
of approx. 9 mph (14 km/h). maneuvering area.
ParkAssist is switched off automatically at high
speed. ParkAssist is switched on again auto-
matically when the speed drops below approx.
9 mph (14 km/h).
The selector lever position determines activation
levels for ParkAssist and the corresponding area
that is monitored. Switching ParkAssist on and off
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 157
Maintenance note
f The sensors must always be kept free of dust,
WWW.MANUALS.WS ice and snow in order to ensure that they are
fully functional.
f Do not damage sensors by abrasion or
scratching.
f Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
steam-jet units.
The sensors will be damaged if the pressure is
too high.
Note on operation
The rear ultrasound sensors may not function
correctly if tires that have not been recommended
by Porsche are fitted on the spare wheel bracket.
If the spare wheel bracket is open, this may impair
Front ultrasound sensors Rear ultrasound sensors the function of the rear ultrasound sensors.
Sensors – Range of rear middle sensors (arrow) In vehicles that have air suspension with level
(only in vehicles without spare wheel bracket): control and height adjustment, the system may
Six ultrasound sensors in the front and rear not recognise obstacles near the ground at terrain
approx. 59 in. or 150 cm
bumpers measure the distance to the closest ob- level or special terrain level.
stacle. – Range of rear middle sensors
(only in vehicles with spare wheel bracket):
– Range of outer sensors
approx. 48 in. or 120 cm
(front and rear):
approx. 24 in. or 60 cm Obstacles cannot be detected in the "blind" sensor
area (above and below the sensors).
– Range of front middle sensors (arrow):
approx. 48 in. or 120 cm
WWW.MANUALS.WS
158 Controls, Safety, Instruments
If the first yellow light segment lights up, the ob-
stacle is still 48 in. or 120 cm (to the front) or
Warning indicators, signal tones, distances If ParkAssist is activated, the green light seg- You can have the volume of the signal tones ad-
ments of the active warning indicators are lit up justed to your own requirements at your autho-
The warning indicator for the front area is located rized Porsche dealer.
continuously.
on the dashboard.
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle that has Note on operation
The warning indicator for the rear area is located
been detected by the sensors, one or more of the
in the rooflining at the rear of the loadspace. If the obstacle is approached even closer after the
yellow or red light segments lights up, depending
continuous tone sounds and the second red light
The warning indicators for the various monitoring on the distance to the obstacle.
segment lights up, the system may not be able to
areas (left and right) are subdivided respectively
recognize the obstacle any longer.
into one green, 4 yellow and 2 red light segments.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 159
Limits of ultrasonic measurement Fault indication with warning tone Driving with a trailer
– ParkAssist cannot detect sound-absorbing ob- In the event of a long-lasting fault in ParkAssist, The ParkAssist rear monitoring area is switched
stacles (e.g. powder snow),
– Sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfac-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
the red light segments of the active warning indi-
cators light up and a continuous tone sounds for
off when the trailer’s power supply is plugged in.
Note
Correct operation is no longer ensured if there is
a temporary fault (e.g. caused by ice formation or
heavy soiling on the sensors).
The system detects the temporary fault.
All light segments light up until a speed of
9 mph (14 km/h) is reached.
ParkAssist is ready for operation again when the
interference has been eliminated.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
160 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Preconditions
– Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– Control switch A must be turned to position C
(passenger mirror’s setting).
– Reverse gear must be engaged.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 161
Warning! Notes on operation
Risk of accident when using the garage door f Always use the garage door opener in the di-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
opener if persons, animals or objects are
within the range of movement of the equip-
rection of travel.
Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
ment that is being operated. out.
f When using the garage door opener, ensure f Before selling the vehicle, delete the
that no persons, animals or objects are within programed signals in keypad A of the garage
the range of movement of the equipment that door opener.
is being operated.
f Please read the instructions for the original
f Observe the safety notes for the original hand- hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
held transmitter. original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
changeable code.
To operate the device in question
(e.g. garage door, gate to the property,
alarm system):
f Press the relevant button in keypad A.
A - Programmable keypad Light-emitting diode B lights up during the
B - Light-emitting diode for status identification
signal transfer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
162 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Garage door opener with fixed code system Garage door opener with changeable code
system
1. Point the original transmitter at the position
WWW.MANUALS.WS
marked.
2. Press the button of the original hand-held
1. Allocate the required button as is done for
systems with fixed codes (points 1 to 4).
transmitter and at the same time the button to 2. To synchronise the system:
be allocated on keypad A. Press the programming button on the receiver
for the garage door actuator.
3. Keep both buttons depressed until light-
Afterwards, you usually have approx.
emitting diode B starts to flash (first slowly and
30 seconds to initiate step 3.
then quickly).
Only release both buttons when light-emitting 3. Press allocated button in keypad A twice
diode B flashes quickly. (in some devices you must press the allocated
The rapidly flashing light-emitting diode B button a third time to complete the setting).
confirms that the new frequency signal was
4. Repeat the programming steps to allocate
programed successfully.
signals for the garage door opener to other
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate signals for the buttons.
garage door opener to other buttons.
Allocating garage door opener signals to Note
the keys f Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer
if you have not been able to successfully allo-
f Please follow the operating instructions for the cate signals for the garage door opener to the
original hand-held transmitter. keys even though you have carefully followed
the instructions in this chapter and the operat-
Before programming the keypad the first
ing instructions for the original hand-held trans-
time with garage door opener signals
mitter.
This process deletes the standard codes set at
f f f
the factory. Do not repeat the process if you
program further buttons.
f Keep the two outer buttons of keypad A
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until
light-emitting diode B begins to flash.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 163
Reprogramming an individual button of
keypad A
1. Press the button of keypad A to be repro-
gramed. Do not release the buttons before
WWW.MANUALS.WS
step 4 is executed.
2. When the light-emitting diode B flashes slowly
(after approximately 20 seconds), point the
original transmitter at the position marked.
3. Press the button of the original hand-held
transmitter and keep it depressed.
4. The light-emitting diode B first flashes slowly
and then more quickly.
Only release both buttons when light-emitting
diode B flashes quickly.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
164 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Ashtray
Warning!
Danger of fire.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
as it could pose a fire hazard.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
166 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Car Audio Operation/Tips Fading and drifting Multipath
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km), ex- Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM, di-
For radio operation see your radio manual
which is included with your on-board litera- WWW.MANUALS.WS
cept for some high power stations.
If a vehicle is moving away from the desired sta-
rect and reflected signals may reach the antenna
at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other
ture.
out.
tion's transmitter, the signal will tend to fade and/
As a vehicle moves through these electronic dead
FM reception or drift. This condition is more prevalent with FM
spots, the listener may hear a momentary flutter
than AM, and is often accompanied by distortion.
or loss of reception.
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio. Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions degree by careful attention to fine tuning or selec- Station swapping
are constantly changing. tion of a stronger signal.
When two FM stations are close to each other, and
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from
Static and fluttering an electronic dead spot, such as static or multi-
other vehicles are all working against good recep-
path area, interrupts the original signal, some-
tion. When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter
times the stronger second signal will be selected
Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or moun-
automatically until the original one returns.
problems when they are not. tains, the radio sound may be accompanied with
This swapping can also occur as you drive away
static or fluttering because of the characteristic of
The following characteristics are completely nor- from the selected station and approach another
FM.
mal for a given reception area, and they do not in- station of a stronger signal.
In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes
dicate any problem with the radio itself.
heard when driving along a tree-lined road.
Note This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjust-
Electronic accessories should only be installed by ing the tone control for greater bass response un-
your authorized Porsche dealer. til the disturbance has passed.
Equipment which has not been tested and ap-
proved by Porsche may impair radio reception.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 167
f If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping
the surfaces from the center to the outside in
WWW.MANUALS.WS
a radial direction with a soft cloth.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
Compact disc player anti-static record preservative.
Disc cleaners are available in audio stores.
Caution!
To avoid damage to compact disc player and
discs.
f Use only compact discs labeled as shown, hav-
ing no dirt, damage or warpage.
f Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part
of the player unit. Do not insert any object oth-
er than a disc into the slot.Remember there are
no user-serviceable parts inside the compact
disc player.
f Do not allow the disc to sustain any finger-
prints, scrapes or stickers on the surfaces.
This may cause poor sound quality.
Hold the disc only on the edge or center hole.
f When not in use, take the disc out of the player,
put the disc back into its case and store it
away from dust, heat, damp and direct sun-
light.
Leaving the disc on the dashboard in the sun
can damage the disc.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
168 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms It is essential to observe the instructions of If aftermarket systems are installed by non-dealer-
the telephone manufacturer before putting ship technicians or outside the selling dealer,
Important legal and safety information re-
garding the use of cellular telephones WWW.MANUALS.WS
the telephone into operation.
Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which
problems may result. Installation of aftermarket
equipment is not covered under the New Car War-
ranty.
Some states may prohibit the use of cellular tele- is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
phones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws and accordance with the technical requirements of f Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about
regulations on the use of cellular telephones in the Porsche. the installation of non Porsche approved equip-
areas where you drive. ment.
The transmission power must not exceed
10 W. Reception quality
Danger!
The devices must possess a type approval for
Risk of an accident. your vehicle and have an “e“ symbol. The reception quality of your car telephone will
Severe personal injury or death can result in change constantly when you are driving. Interfer-
If you should require equipment with transmission ence caused by buildings, landscape and weather
the event of an accident.
power values greater than 10 W, please consult is unavoidable. It may become particularly difficult
Looking away from the road or turning your
your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose. to hear when using the hands-free function due to
attention away from your driving can cause
He is familiar with the technical requirements for external noise such as engine and wind noise.
an accident and serious personal injury or
installing devices of this kind.
death.
The antennas for all radios and telephones with a Automatic car-wash
When using your cellular telephone, you should al-
transmitting antenna must be externally mounted. f Unscrew external antennas before using an au-
ways:
The improper installation of radios or telephones tomatic car-wash.
f Give full attention to your driving - pull off the
or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
road and park before making or answering a
antenna inside the car may cause the warning
call if traffic conditions so require; and
lights to come on.
f Keep both hands on the steering wheel - use
Improper installation of such equipment can cre-
hands-free operation (if available) - pull off the
ate a discharged battery or excessive current
road and park before using a hand-held tele-
draw from added equipment.
phone.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 169
Porsche Communication When put into operation for the first time, a dis- Satellite radio
tance of approx. 3 miles (5 km) must be driven in
Management (PCM)
Warning!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
order for the navigation system to complete the
process of fine calibration. The same applies
You must have the satellite radio activated before
you can put it into operation. You will need a con-
tract with a provider in order to use this radio.
when the tires are changed (e.g. summer/winter
tires) or new tires fitted.
There is a danger of accident if you set or f Refer to the separate radio operating instruc-
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi- Full location accuracy is not yet achieved during tions before putting into operation.
gation system, telephone or other equipment the fine-calibration process.
when driving.
This could distract you from the traffic and If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car
cause you to lose control of the vehicle re- train), the system may take a few minutes after
sulting in serious personal injury or death. being switched on before it determines the current
location.
f Operate the components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow)
may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary When the battery has been disconnected, it may
take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
f If it is necessary to operate these components system is operational once more.
while the vehicle is in motion, use the function
keys on the multi-functional steering wheel.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
170 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Note
f Pay attention to the expiration date on the fire
WWW.MANUALS.WS
extinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used
after its expiration date has elapsed, it may not
function properly.
f Follow the operating instructions for the fire
extinguisher.
f The functional ability of the fire extinguisher
should be checked by a specialist workshop
every 1-2 years.
f After use, have the fire extinguisher refilled.
Fire Extinguisher
If the vehicle is equipped with a fire extinguisher, it
is mounted underneath the left or right front seat,
depending on equipment level.
Warning!
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– In the glasses case in the roof console
– In the glove compartment, pen holder
come loose during braking, rapid directional – In the front and rear armrests
changes or in an accident and cause serious
– In the drawer underneath the passenger’s seat
personal injury or death.
– In the storage compartments at the sides of
f Do not carry items of luggage or objects in the
the luggage compartment
passenger compartment unsecured.
– In the door trim panels
f Do not transport any heavy objects in open
storage trays. – In the center console, front and rear
f Always keep the storage trays closed while – On the back of the front seats
driving.
– Coat hook on the rear grab handles
f Always protect the passenger compartment
– Under the load compartment floor
with a safety net and a luggage compartment
cover. – In the front and rear cupholders Glasses case in the roof console
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR- Sunglasses (for example) can be stored in this
MATION” on Page 191. storage compartment.
Opening
f Press button (arrow).
Closing
f Close the lid until it clicks audibly into place.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
172 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Opening
f Press button A and open cover.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Locking
f Always lock button A with the car key to secure
the contents from unauthorized access.
A drawer, designed to hold the vehicle folder, is lo- f Rotate thumb wheel B rightwards.
cated in the glove compartment.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 173
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Storage trays in the armrest between the Opening the lower tray Storage tray in the rear armrest
front seats f Press button B and lift top tray with the cover One storage tray is located in the armrest.
Two storages trays are located in the armrest. closed.
Opening the storage tray in the armrest
Opening the top tray
1. Fold down the armrest completely.
f Press button A and lift the cover.
2. Press button C and lift the cover.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
174 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Opening the storage compartment
f Pull off the cover on the handle recess.
WWW.MANUALS.WS Closing the storage compartment
f First, insert the cover at the bottom and then
close it until it clicks audibly into place.
Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Because of the heat, the right-hand storage
compartment cannot be used as such in
vehicles that have air suspension with level
control and height adjustment.
Closing
f Close the drawer until it clicks audibly into
place. WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 175
Cupholder
You can place drinks cans and cups in the cup-
holder. WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Keep the cupholder closed while driving.
Warning!
Risk of accident, scalding or damage due to
spilling drinks.
f Only use cupholder when safe to do so it is.
f Only use containers which fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Never use hot drinks.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
176 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Opening rear cupholder DVD player under the right front seat Closing the cover
f Press on the cover of the cupholder (arrow). On vehicles with DVD navigation, the DVD player is f Insert the four guide lugs of the cover into their
under the right front seat behind a cover. openings (arrow).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 177
Rear Lid
The equipment features “Porsche Entry & Drive”
WWW.MANUALS.WS
and “spare wheel bracket” affect operation of the
rear lid.
f Please observe the chapter “PORSCHE ENTRY
& DRIVE” on Page 24.
f Please observe the chapter “SPARE WHEEL”
on Page 299.
Danger!
Risk of poisoning. Exhaust gases can enter
the passenger compartment when the rear
lid is open.
f Always keep the rear lid closed when the
engine is running.
Unlocking rear lid f Briefly press button 2 on the remote control.
f Always keep the rear lid closed while driving. If the vehicle doors and the rear lid are not
f Pull button A in the driver’s door or opened, the rear lid will lock automatically after
30 seconds.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
178 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Warning!
Danger of crushing. The rear lid is auto-
WWW.MANUALS.WS matically pulled into the lock and locked.
f Make sure that your fingers are not under the
rear lid.
f Keep foreign objects or limbs away from mov-
ing parts (latch striker) of the power closing
mechanism.
f Do not leave children in the car unattended.
Automatic locking
f Please observe the chapter “TAILGATE” on
Page 102.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 179
Unlocking Engine Compartment Lid
f Briefly press button 2 on the remote control.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The rear window can be opened with unlocking
button A.
Opening
Caution!
WWW.MANUALS.WS Danger!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, result-
ing in serious personal injury or death.
f Should you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it.
The front lid may fly up impairing vision.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 181
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Loadspace 2. Unclip prop B and insert it into receiver C in the Tie-down rings
loadspace floor.
The maximum permissible load on the loadspace You can secure the load in the luggage compart-
floor is 880 lbs. or 400 kg. The weight must be ment against slipping. Tie-down straps or the
distributed evenly over the entire loadspace.
Closing loadspace floor
luggage net can be fastened to tie-down rings D.
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR- 1. Lift the loadspace floor slightly and clip prop B f Make sure that all rings are equally loaded
MATION” on Page 191. into its holder in the vehicle floor. when securing a load.
2. Close the loadspace floor.
Opening loadspace floor Note on operation
The tie-down rings are not designed to restrain a
1. Pull handle A and lift the loadspace floor. heavy load in an accident.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
182 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Luggage Compartment Cover
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The luggage can be protected against prying eyes
with the luggage compartment cover.
f Always pull out the luggage compartment cov-
er when transporting objects in the luggage
compartment.
The luggage compartment cover is not de-
signed to carry objects.
f Do not hang bags or objects on the support
brackets A. The support brackets could break
off.
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR-
MATION” on Page 191.
Warning!
Danger of injury. During braking, direction Pulling out luggage compartment cover Remove luggage compartment cover
changes or in an accident, objects can slide
into the passenger compartment and endan- f Pull out the cover by the handle and insert it f Pull the release B back.
into the guides on the left and right side walls
ger the occupants. f Lift the cover at the right and remove.
of the luggage compartment.
f Do not place objects on top of the luggage
compartment cover.
Retracting luggage compartment cover
f Disengage the luggage compartment cover
from the guides on the side walls and carefully
guide it back into the retractor roller.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 183
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
184 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Luggage Safety Net Permitted uses
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR-
MATION” on Page 191. WWW.MANUALS.WS
Option 1
Warning!
Danger of injury. During braking, direction
changes or in an accident, an unsecured
load can slip and endanger the occupants. Option 2
f Always secure the passenger compartment
with the luggage safety net.
f Always fasten the load at the tie-down rings.
f The load must never project over the top edge
Securing interior with luggage safety net
of the seat backrest.
f If the safety net was heavily stressed or dam- Pulling out luggage safety net
aged during braking or an accident, etc., have f Open covers of the luggage safety net
the luggage safety net and its bracket checked brackets.
by an authorized Porsche dealer. Option 3
f Pull the luggage safety net out and engage the
fastening hooks on the left and right sides into
the rings on the ceiling.
The luggage safety net fastening hooks can be
pulled out at the sides.
f Make sure that the luggage safety net fasten-
ing hooks are properly engaged in the rings.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Please observe the chapter “FOLDING REAR
SEATS FORWARD” on Page 37.
Removing luggage safety net assembly Fastening luggage safety net assembly at
from the rear seat backrest the bottom of the rear seat backrest
1. Open both rear doors. If you wish to make better use of the luggage
space, you can fasten the luggage safety net as-
2. Fold down the left seat backrest first, followed
sembly at the lower part of the rear seat backrest.
by the right seat backrest. The seat cushions
need not be folded for this purpose. f Insert the luggage safety net assembly into re-
ceivers A and push it in up to the stop
f Please observe the chapter “FOLDING REAR
(arrows).
SEATS FORWARD” on Page 37.
3. Push the luggage safety net assembly in the
direction of the arrow 1.
4. Lift the luggage safety net assembly off in the
direction of arrow 2.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
186 Controls, Safety, Instruments
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Ski Bag 2. Fold down the armrest of the rear seat back- 5. Pull out and unfold the ski bag.
rest.
Long objects such as skis can be transported in 6. Insert objects into the ski bag from the
the passenger compartment, where they can be 3. Pull protective cover B off the Velcro strap at luggage compartment.
kept clean and protected against damage. the top and lower it.
4. Press release button C on the lid of the
Loading ski bag through-load facility downwards and fold down
the lid.
1. Press release button A on the lid of the
through-load facility.
Open the lid downward.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 187
Stowing ski bag
WWW.MANUALS.WS
1. Empty ski bag.
2. Pull ski bag into the passenger compartment.
3. Close lid in the luggage compartment.
4. Carefully fold the ski bag and close the lid.
5. Put in the protective cover and secure it with
the Velcro strap.
Note on operation
f Fold up the ski bag only when it is dry.
Securing load
f Secure the stowed objects with tightening
belt D.
f Insert belt tongue into the buckle.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
188 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Roof Transport System Warning! When the Roof Transport System is loaded, the
maximum speed depends on the nature, size and
Risk of an accident, loss of control and dam-
f Please follow the separate instructions for
fitting the Roof Transport System. WWW.MANUALS.WS
age to the vehicle.
weight of the load being carried.
f But never drive faster than 90 mph
f Completely remove the Roof Transport System
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR- (140 km/h).
before using an automatic car wash – risk of
MATION” on Page 191.
damage to the vehicle. f With the basic carrier fitted and no load, do not
Fitting normal commercially available luggage exceed a maximum speed of 110 mph
f Do not exceed the permissible roof load, the
racks is not possible. (180 km/h).
permissible gross weight and the permissible
The Porsche Roof Transport System allows the axle loads. Adapt your driving style and speed to the changed
transport of various sports and hobby equipment. Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on conditions.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to Page 352. Nevertheless, Porsche recommends that you do
tell you about the manifold uses of the Roof Trans- not exceed the posted speed limit.
f Distribute load evenly, with heavy items as low
port System.
as possible. Items of luggage must not project Driving, braking and steering behavior change due
beyond the side of the load area. to the higher center of gravity and the greater
wind-resistant area. You should adapt your driving
f Fix and secure every item to the basic carrier
style appropriately.
with a rope or lashing strap (do not use elastic
rubber tensioners). f Since fuel consumption and noise are in-
creased with the Roof Transport System fitted,
f Before every journey, and at regular intervals
it should not remain on the car if not in use.
during long trips, check that Roof Transport
System and load are secure. Re-tighten if
necessary and secure additionally by locking.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 189
f Use only ADAPTER makes tested and appro- Hitching trailer
ved by Porsche.
f Always turn off the alarm system before you at-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Ensure that all trailer equipment conforms to
the appropriate classification for total gross
tach a trailer. The inclination sensor could trig-
ger the alarm unintentionally.
trailer weight and tongue weight.
f Follow the operating instructions for the trailer
f Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on recommended by the trailer manufacturer.
Page 352.
f Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on
f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR- Page 352.
MATION” on Page 191.
Unhitching trailer
Retrofitting
f If the trailer is equipped with an overrun brake,
Have a trailer coupling retrofitted only by an autho- do not unhitch the trailer when its brake is still
rized Porsche dealer. The dealer is familiar with applied.
the manufacturer's specifications and any neces-
sary conversion measures.
Trailer Coupling
Warning!
Electrical connection
Risk of accident. Your Porsche is equipped with a 7-pin connector A
for the electrical connection to the trailer.
f Follow the operating instructions for the trailer
recommended by the trailer manufacturer.
Warning!
f Do not modify or repair the trailer coupling.
Risk of accident. Failure to keep an electrical
f Before having new ADAPTER fitted, find out adapter clean may result in corrosion and af-
from your authorized Porsche dealer about the fect operation of electrical lines, resulting in
current authorization status. possible trailer brake system failure.
f Periodically inspect and clean adapter as
needed.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
190 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Loading Information The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This infor- cargo, the substracted weight of passengers from
Definitions WWW.MANUALS.WS
mation is located on the safety comliance sticker
located in the driver’s side door jamb.
the load limit.
f Never exceed the permissible limits.
The towing capacity (gross weight of the trailer) For determining the compatibility of the tire and
is the sum of the trailer's empty weight and the vehicle load capabilities: Gefahr!
weight of the load.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRES, RIMS, Risk of personal injury or death.
The vertical coupling load is the weight that the TRACKS” on Page 348. Injuries are much more likely in an accident
trailer drawbar exerts on the trailer coupling of the if persons ride in the cargo area.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) is a mi-
vehicle.
nimum requirement. f Persons must ride only on the seats provided
The rear-axle load is the vehicle weight on the for this purpose.
The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the
rear axle plus the weight of the transported load
and the vertical coupling load of the trailer.
maximum total weight rating of vehicle, passen- f Make sure that everybody fastens their safety
gers, cargo and trailer. belts.
The gross weight of the vehicle and trailer is
The Vehicle Capacity Weight - Load Limit - is Risk of personal injury, loss of control and
the sum of the weight of the towing vehicle and the
the maximum total weight limit specified of the damage to vehicle.
weight of the trailer.
load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
The Curb weight - actual weight of your vehicle - is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo f Never exceed the specified axle loads.Overloa-
vehicle weight including standard and optional that can be loaded into the vehicle. This informa- ding can shorten the service life of the tires
equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire tion can be found on the tire pressure plate. and car, as well as lead to dangerous vehicle
assembly. This weight does not include passen- If a trailer is being towed, the trailer tongue weight reactions and long braking distances. Damage
gers and cargo. must be included as part of the cargo load. due to overloading is not covered by the vehic-
le warranty.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is sum of the curb The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle ca-
combined. pacity weight and production options weight.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maxi- The load rating is the maximum load that a tire
mum total weight of vehicle, passengers, lug- is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
gage, hitch, trailer tongue load and optional equip-
The maximum load rating is the load rating for
ment.
a tire at the maximum permissble inflation pres-
sure.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 191
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
WWW.MANUALS.WS pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five - 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available car-
go and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Example for determining the combined weight of occup- Determing the combined weight of
ants and cargo Consult this manual to determine how this re-
occupants and cargo:
duces the available cargo and luggage load ca-
f Add the weight of all occupants and then add pacity of your vehicle.
Vehicle Load Capacity the total luggage weight (figure).
f The combined weight of occupants and cargo
Steps for determing correct load limit
should never exceed the weight shown on the
tire plate in the vehicle. 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of
Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
PLATE” on Page 273. pounds" on your vehicle’s placard (depending
on the date of manufacture).
f Never exceed the number of passengers
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehic-
le.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
192 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Stowing load in the vehicle f If the rear seats are not occupied, the back- Driving
rests can be additionally secured with the safe-
f The car's handling changes depending on the
Warning!
Danger of injury.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
ty belts. Simply cross the outer safety belts
and insert each into the opposite buckle.
vehicle load. Adapt your driving style to the
changed driving behavior.
f Make sure that the load cannot damage the
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned cargo f Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and
can slip out of place or endanger the vehicle heating filaments of the rear window and the
the axle load.
occupants during braking, direction changes TV antenna of the side window.
or in accidents. f Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on
Never transport objects which are not se- Luggage net Page 352.
cured. f Luggage must be stowed completely covered f Never drive with the rear window or rear lid
f Always transport cargo in the cargo area, nev- by the luggage net. open.
er in the passenger compartment (e.g. on or in The luggage net can prevent only lightweight Exhaust gases can enter the passenger
front of the seats). objects from slipping. compartment.
f Support the cargo on the seat backrests when- Tie-down belts f Adapt the tire pressure to the load.
ever possible. Always lock the backrests into
f Do not use elastic belts or straps to tie down f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU-
place. RES, COLD” on Page 350.
a load.
f Place the cargo behind unoccupied seats
f Do not place belts and straps over sharp edg-
whenever possible.
es.
f Stow heavy objects as close to the front of the
f Observe the directions for use and information
cargo area as possible, with lightweight ob-
for the tie-down equipment.
jects behind them.
f Use only belts with a tear strength of at least
f The cargo must never project over the top
1543 lbs. or 700 kg and a maximum width of
edge of the seat backrest.
1 in or 25 mm.
f Always protect the passenger compartment
f Cross the belts over the load.
with a luggage safety net and a luggage
compartment cover.
Do not drive with objects on top of the luggage
compartment cover.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 193
Towing a trailer Distributing the load Door mirrors
f Distribute the load in the trailer so that heavy f If the width of the trailer obstructs your view of
Warning!
Driving with a trailer
WWW.MANUALS.WS
objects are as close to the axle as possible.
Always safeguard all objects against slipping
the traffic behind the trailer, you must have ad-
ditional door mirrors fitted.
and tie them down securely.
f Always observe the permissible towing capac- Headlights, lights
ity, vertical coupling load and rear-axle load. f You should make the best possible use of the
Please observe the chapter “WEIGHTS” on trailer coupling's rated vertical coupling load f Check whether the plug of the trailer is
Page 352. when loading the trailer, but never exceed it. plugged into the towing vehicle and whether all
lights function.
f When connected, the trailer must always be Tire pressure
horizontal behind the towing vehicle. If neces-
sary, use a trailer with an adjustable drawbar. f Select the vehicle tire pressure for full load
when towing a trailer.
f When the vehicle is driven in the mountains, the
engine output decreases as altitude increases. f Please observe the chapter “Tire pressure ta-
The maximum weights stated are the values at bles”.
sea level. The total weight of the car-trailer f Check the tire pressure of the trailer's wheels
combination must therefore be reduced by according to the manufacturer's instructions.
10% for each increment of 3,280 ft. or
1,000 metres altitude. A fractional increment
counts as the full 1,000 metres. Please take
this into consideration when planning your
route.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
194 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Driving with a trailer f Slow down immediately if the trailer starts to
sway. Do not countersteer; brake if necessary.
When towing a trailer you must under all
circumstances adapt your speed to prevailing
road and driving conditions.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Never attempt to straighten out the car-trailer
combination by accelerating.
In no event should you exeed a speed of 50 mph f Activate Low Range when moving off on steep
(80 km/h). Towing in excessive speed can result slopes.
in loss of control.
f Under no circumstances may people, animals
f Carefully and gradually familiarize yourself with or objects be in the space between the trailer
the handling and braking behavior of the car- and the towing vehicle when the vehicle is
trailer combination. moving.
f Do not drive with the towing vehicle empty and f When reversing, bear in mind that ParkAssist is
the trailer loaded. not active.
If this unfavorable combination is unavoidable,
please drive especially slowly.
Maintenance note
f Bear in mind the different vehicle handling and f Please take into consideration that driving with
size in situations such as braking, parking, a trailer places markedly greater stress on all
cornering and overtaking, etc. vehicle components. Expert inspection and
f The driving stability of the car-trailer combina- maintenance after every use are indispensable
tion worsens as the speed increases. There- prerequisites for proper functioning and safety.
fore, drive especially slowly on downhill
stretches and in the case of unfavorable road
and weather conditions (such as wind).
f Drive in an appropriately low gear on downhill
stretches in order to make use of the engine
braking effect.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Controls, Safety, Instruments 195
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
196 Controls, Safety, Instruments
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
WWW.MANUALS.WS Tiptronic S................................................. 198
Selector Lever Positions ............................. 199
Driving Programs for On-Road
and Off-Road Driving................................... 206
Power-Transmission and
Running-Gear Control Systems .................... 211
Off-Road Driving ......................................... 220
Air Suspension with Level Control
and Height Adjustment................................ 228
Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM) .................................. 231
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 197
Tiptronic S Release button
The release button (arrow) on the front side of the
and features an “automatic” and a “manual” gear-WWW.MANUALS.WS
The Porsche Tiptronic is a six-speed transmission
selector lever prevents unintentional gear chang-
es.
shift mode.
The release button must be pressed when shifting
In automatic selection mode (selector lever po-
to position R or P.
sition D), gear changing is automatic.
Depending on the driving program, you can The selector lever cannot be operated in the event
change temporarily from automatic to manual of an electrical fault.
mode using the rocker switches on the steering
f Please observe the chapter “SELECTOR LE-
wheel.
VER EMERGENCY RELEASE” on Page 205.
In manual selection mode (selector lever
position M), you change gear using the rocker Starting
switches on the steering wheel or by pushing the
selector lever forward or back. The engine can be started only in selector lever
You can change between selector lever positions position P or N with the brake pedal pressed.
D and M as you wish while driving.
Changing the selector lever position Moving off
Note on operation
The selector lever is locked with the ignition key f Select the desired position for moving off
Take care not to operate the rocker switches on withdrawn. (D, M or R) only when the engine is idling and
the steering wheel inadvertently, thereby trigger-
The selector lever can be moved from position P when depressing the brake pedal.
ing undesired gear changes.
or N only with: f Since the car creeps when in gear, do not re-
– The ignition switched on lease the brake until you want to move off.
– The brake pedal pressed and f After selecting a gear, do not accelerate until
you can feel that the gear is engaged.
– The release button pressed
WWW.MANUALS.WS
198 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
If there is a fault in the transmission: Selector Lever Positions
– All gear indicators light up
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– The transmission no longer shifts. P – Parking lock
f Have the fault rectified immediately at your au- In selector lever position P, the driven wheels are
thorized Porsche dealer. mechanically locked.
f Engage parking lock only when vehicle is
stationary.
f Engage parking lock after applying the park-
ing brake and release it before releasing the
parking brake.
f Always apply the parking brake before leaving
the vehicle.
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in selector
lever position P.
Selector lever position
R – Reverse
Indicator for selector lever position and f Select reverse only if car is stationary and the
engaged gear brake is applied.
When the engine is running, the selector lever po-
sition and engaged gear are indicated. N – Neutral
Selector lever position N must be selected for
towing or in car washes, for example.
f Select the desired position for moving off
(D, M or R) only when the engine is idling and
when depressing the brake pedal.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 199
D - Automatic selection mode (in the road The bend is taken in the right gear, and when you The system leaves manual selection mode:
driving program) accelerate out of the bend you do not have to
– automatically after around 8 seconds
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The functions of selector lever positions D and M
differ in the on-road program, High Range, and in
change down.
Moving off
(unless car is cornering, overrunning or
stationary),
the off-road program, Low Range. In 2nd gear, the vehicle moves off with the throttle – if you depress the accelerator to kickdown.
f Use selector lever position D for “normal” driv- only slightly open. Move off in 1st gear with the
Temporary change-down
ing. throttle open wider or when the engine is cold.
The gears are shifted automatically according When PSM is switched off, the car generally Precondition
to the accelerator position and speed. moves off in 1st gear.
– Speed is higher than approx. 33 mph
Depending on the way the vehicle is driven and on Shifting gear on the steering wheel (54 km/h).
the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear-changing
By shifting gear with the rocker switches on the f Depress accelerator quickly.
points are shifted towards higher or lower engine- The Tiptronic changes temporarily to the sport-
speed ranges. Movement of the accelerator, steering wheel, you can temporarily change from
automatic selection mode D to manual selection iest gear-changing map, i.e. to the highest pos-
driving speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration sible gear-changing points. Correspondingly,
and the road profile all have an influence on the mode M.
the transmission shifts down immediately by
gear-changing characteristic. Advantages one, two or three gears.
When PSM is switched off, transmission gear
changes are done at higher engine speeds. – Shifting down before bends and on entering
Ending the function
built-up areas.
Unwanted upward shifts, e.g. before bends, are f Release the accelerator markedly (by approx.
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator ped- – Shifting down on downward slopes (engine
25%).
al. braking).
Depending on lateral acceleration, upward chang- – Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
es on bends are not made until the engine-speed – Selecting 1st or 2nd gear for moving off.
limit is reached.
The manual selection mode remains engaged:
During braking, and depending on the amount of
deceleration, the Tiptronic changes down earlier. – For cornering (depending on the lateral accel-
For subsequent cornering, the right gear is en- eration) and overrunning,
gaged when pressure is applied to the brakes be- – When the vehicle is stationary (e.g. at a junc-
fore the bend. tion).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
200 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Kickdown Depending on the route profile, the gear-changing The system leaves manual selection mode:
points are shifted towards higher or lower engine-
The kickdown function is active in selector lever – Automatically after around 8 seconds
position D. WWW.MANUALS.WS
f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when overtak-
speed ranges. On steep downhill stretches, up-
ward shifts are prevented until medium engine
(unless car is subject to high lateral accelera-
tion, is overrunning or stationary),
speeds are reached (at least 2,500 rpm).
ing, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the – if you depress the accelerator to kickdown.
When the car is overrunning, an automatic upshift
full-throttle point (kickdown).
does not occur when the engine speed limit is Kickdown
The transmission shifts down depending on the reached.
speed of travel and engine speed. The kickdown function is active in selector lever
Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine Moving off position D.
speeds. The car moves off in 1st gear. f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when overtak-
These gear-changing speeds remain active until ing, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
the accelerator is released to approx. 80% of the Shifting gear on the steering wheel full-throttle point (kickdown).
full-throttle position.
By shifting gear with the rocker switches on the The transmission shifts down depending on the
steering wheel, you can temporarily change from speed of travel and engine speed.
D - Automatic selection mode (in the off- automatic selection mode D to manual selection Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine
road driving program) mode M. speeds.
The functions of selector lever positions D and M Advantages These gear-changing speeds remain active until
differ in the on-road program, High Range, and in the accelerator is released to approx. 80% of the
– Shifting down on downward slopes (engine full-throttle position.
the off-road program, Low Range.
braking).
f Use selector lever position D for “normal” driv- Tip on driving
– Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
ing.
Unlike in the on-road driving program, an auto-
The gears are shifted automatically according – Selecting 1st/2nd or 3rd gear for moving off.
matic upshift is not performed in manual selection
to the accelerator position and speed.
The manual selection mode remains engaged: mode M when the engine-speed limit is reached.
The gears are shifted automatically according to
– For overrunning
the accelerator position and speed. The gear-
changing points have been adjusted to achieve the – Depending on lateral acceleration
best possible vehicle control on difficult terrain.
– When the vehicle is stationary (e.g. at a junc-
tion).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 201
Warning! You can change down two gears by quickly press-
ing rocker switches A or selector lever B twice.
The kickdown function is not active in manual
WWW.MANUALS.WS
selection mode “M“.
The kickdown function cannot be used to
If PSM is active and the engine-speed limit is
reached, an automatic upward shift is performed
downshift in manual selection mode “M“. or, just before idling speed is reached, a down-
ward shift is performed.
f Therefore shift down manually when accelerat-
ing (e.g. to overtake). f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
Shifting up This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
f Press upper part (+) of a rocker switch A or
If manual mode fails, the control electronics
f Push selector lever B forward in the M gate. switch to automatic mode.
In this event, the instrument panel will display se-
Shifting down lector lever position D.
f Press lower part (–) of a rocker switch A or
f To remedy the fault, please consult an autho-
f Push selector lever B back in the M gate. rized Porsche dealer.
M - Manual selection mode (in the road
Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
driving program)
you can shift up or down at any time. Gear chang-
The functions of selector lever positions D and M es which would exceed the upper or lower engine-
differ in the on-road program, High Range, and in speed limit are not executed by the control unit.
the off-road program, Low Range.
The currently selected gear is retained if you
change from D to M.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map
suitable for your current driving style is selected
and the appropriate gear is selected.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
202 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
M - Manual selection mode (in the off- Shifting down Stopping
road driving program) f Press lower part (–) of a rocker switch A or
f For a brief stop (e.g. at a traffic light), leave the
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The functions of selector lever positions D and M
differ in the on-road program, High Range, and in
f Push selector lever B back in the M gate. selector lever in drive position and hold the ve-
hicle with the brake pedal.
Depending on driving speed and engine speed,
the off-road program, Low Range.
you can shift up or down at any time. Gear chang- f Do not hold the car on a slope using the accel-
The currently selected gear is retained if you es which would exceed the upper or lower engine- erator. Use the brake pedal or the parking
change from D to M. speed limit are not executed by the control unit. brake instead.
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map You can change down two gears by quickly press- f Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the
suitable for your current driving style is selected ing rocker switches A or selector lever B twice. handbrake and move the selector lever to
and the appropriate gear is selected. position P.
The gear is changed down automatically just be-
fore idle speed is reached. Tip on driving
Warning!
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward In selector lever positions D and M, the Hillholder
The kickdown function is not active in manual and downward slopes.
selection mode “M“. prevents the car from rolling backward when it has
This will ensure optimum use of engine power been stopped on an upward slope with the engine
The kickdown function cannot be used to and engine braking.
downshift in manual selection mode “M“. running.
Shifting up
f Press upper part (+) of a rocker switch A or
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Push selector lever B forward in the M gate.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
204 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Selector lever emergency release 4. Lift trim C at the rear and carefully pull it off. 6. Press foam aside.
In the event of an electrical fault, the selector lever 5. Unplug plug connection D. 7. Press locking lever E aside (to the left) using a
lock in position P can be manually released (for suitable object.
towing the vehicle, for example). 8. Move selector lever to position N.
1. Raise center armrest. 9. Reassemble in reverse order.
2. Use the key for emergency operation of the
sliding/lifting roof to undo screws A. Danger!
Please observe the chapter “EMERGENCY Risk of loss of control and personal injury.
OPERATION OF SLIDING/LIFTING ROOF” on
Page 149. f Ensure that the parking brake of the vehicle is
set and that vehicle does not move on its own.
3. Remove trim mounting B.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 205
With rocker switch A, you can easily select the ap- Each time the rocker switch is pushed forward,
propriate driving program to suit the special re- the vehicle becomes one step more suitable for
WWW.MANUALS.WS
quirements for the respective terrain.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
206 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
f Push rocker switch A forward until activation of
Low Range indicator light
the off-road driving program is indicated on the
WWW.MANUALS.WS
If the Low Range indicator light beside the rocker
switch flashes when you attempt to operate rock-
multi-purpose display of the instrument panel
and by illumination of light-emitting diode B.
The Low Range indicator light on the instru-
er switch, the conditions for a shift have not been
ment panel and light-emitting diode B beside
met:
the rocker switch flash several times during
– Vehicle has exceeded or gone below the limit the shifting process.
speed. Low Range is now engaged.
– Selector lever is not in position N.
Danger!
Serious risk of injury or death. Risk of
accident due to uncontrolled vehicle
movement. The selector lever is blocked
during the shifting procedure. Shifting when
driving uphill can cause the vehicle to stand
still or even roll backwards, if the shifting
procedure has not yet been completed.
A - Rocker switch
B - Low Range is engaged When driving downhill, the vehicle can accel-
erate unintentionally while shifting.
Changing from on-road driving program f Increased brake readiness is required.
to off-road driving program
f Please observe the chapter “POWER-TRANS-
f Reduce speed to below 9 mph (15 km/h) or MISSION AND RUNNING-GEAR CONTROL SYS-
stop vehicle. TEMS” on Page 211.
f Move selector lever to position N.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 207
f Push rocker switch A forwards in stages until
engagement of the center differential lock (lon-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
gitudinal lock) is indicated on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel and by the illu-
mination of the two light-emitting diodes B and
C.
The center differential lock is changed over to
fully engaged state by the automatic control
system.
Note on operation
The anti-roll bars are engaged automatically when
a speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) is exceeded or
when the lateral acceleration value is high.
Notes
Engagement of the anti-roll bars is audible.
At temperatures below –4°F (–20 °C), the anti-roll
bars take somewhat longer to engage.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 209
Indicator light and warnings Changing from off-road driving program Danger!
to on-road driving program Serious risk of injury or death. Risk of
Indication of a fault by:
– Continuous illumination of the light-emitting
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Reduce speed to below 19 mph (30 km/h) or
stop vehicle.
accident due to uncontrolled vehicle
movement. The selector lever is blocked
during the shifting procedure. Shifting when
diode in the button
f Move selector lever to position N. driving uphill can cause the vehicle to stand
– Illumination of the warning light on the still or even roll backwards, if the shifting
f Pull rocker switch A back in stages until light-
instrument panel procedure has not yet been completed.
emitting diodes B, C and if necessary, D are
When driving downhill, the vehicle can accel-
– A message on the multi-purpose display of the out.
erate unintentionally while shifting.
instrument panel The Low Range indicator light on the instru-
ment panel and light-emitting diode B beside f Increased brake readiness is required.
f Adapt your driving behavior to the changed
the rocker switch flash several times during
conditions.
the shifting process. f Please observe the chapter “POWER-TRANS-
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized Porsche
High Range is active. MISSION AND RUNNING-GEAR CONTROL SYS-
delaer and have the fault remedied.
TEMS” on Page 211.
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 106.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
210 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Power-Transmission and Running-Gear Control Systems
WWW.MANUALS.WS
A complex interconnection of all control systems acting in power transmission and in the running gear has been realised in your Porsche.
All control systems have been linked with the aim of combining the best possible driving performance with maximum safety.
The following systems are involved:
System/designation Scope
PTM – Full-time all-wheel drive
Porsche Traction Management
– Electronically controlled center differential lock
– Automatic brake differential (ABD)
– Traction control system (TCS)
– Reduction gear/Low Range
PTM Plus In addition to the PTM features, PTM Plus also includes:
Porsche Traction Management
– Electronically controlled rear differential lock
– Hydraulically disengageable anti-roll bars
Air suspension – Fully load bearing air spring struts with integral shock absorbers
with level control and height adjustment
– Air supply system with pressure accumulator
PASM – Shock absorber system with adaptive, continuous shock absorber control
Porsche Active Suspension Management
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 211
Porsche Traction Management (PTM) Advantages of PTM Caution!
– Obvious improvement in traction, driving stabil- In spite of the advantages of PTM, it is still the driv-
Porsche Traction Management is a full-time all-
wheel control system designed to influence the
longitudinal and lateral dynamics. It is closely
WWW.MANUALS.WS
ity and steering ability of the car.
– Vehicle is more manageable when driven at its
er’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and
maneuvres in line with road and weather condi-
tions, as well as the traffic situation.
linked with the Porsche Stability Management performance limits.
(PSM) system: The increased safety that is provided should not in-
– Improved straight-ahead tracking and stability.
duce you to take greater risks with your safety.
PTM ensures the best possible power distribution
– The aforementioned features allow for a sport- The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
to the four driven wheels at the front and rear ax-
ier setup of the running gear. overcome, even with PTM.
les. The system realises this optimal traction by in-
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed
tervening in the lock control function of the trans- – The TCS and ABD provide even better traction
cannot be reduced by PTM.
fer case and rear differential. PTM is active at all for all wheels.
times and, unlike the PSM, cannot be switched off.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
212 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Full-time all-wheel drive Automatic brake differential (ABD) Traction control system (TCS)
With the four-wheel drive, the drive power is vari- The ABD system controls the front and rear axles The traction control system prevents the wheels
ably distributed to the front and rear wheels.
Power distribution and wheel speed compensation
WWW.MANUALS.WS
separately. If one wheel of an axle starts to spin,
it is braked so that the other wheel on the same
from spinning by adjusting the engine power,
thereby ensuring good lane-holding ability and a
between the front and rear axles is realised with a axle can be driven. stable driving behavior.
transfer box.
The ABD recognises different driving states, and it
Distribution of the drive power depends on the features control strategies adapted to these
wheel speed difference between the two axles. states. In situations in which little propulsive power
The transfer box always controls power distribu- is required, such as when the car moves off on a
tion in such a way that optimal propulsion is level gravel surface, traction control already be-
achieved, even on an unfavorable road surface. comes active at low engine speeds. If great
propulsive power is required, e.g. when moving off
Full-time four-wheel drive ensures optimal handling
on an uphill slope or for rapid acceleration, the
and great stability.
ABD is adapted accordingly.
A special off-road program is used in Low Range
Caution! mode.
In spite of the advantages of four-wheel drive, it is
still the driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving
style and maneuvers in line with road and weather
conditions, as well as the traffic situation.
The increased safety that is provided should not in-
duce you to take greater risks with your safety.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
overcome, even with four-wheel drive.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed can-
not be reduced by four-wheel drive.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 213
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) Advantages of PSM Readiness for operation
– Best possible traction and lane-holding ability PSM is switched on automatically every time you
PSM is an active control system for stabilisation of
the vehicle during extreme driving maneuvres. It
operates together with the Porsche Traction
WWW.MANUALS.WS
in all driving situations – even on road surfaces
with varying friction.
start the engine.
Function
Management (PTM) system. – The system compensates for undesired vehi-
cle reactions (Ferraria effect) when the driver Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system
PSM makes use of both the ABD and TCS sys- and engine continuously measure:
releases the accelerator pedal or brakes on
tems, as well as the known functions of the anti-
bends. This compensation functions up to the – Driving speed
lock brake system (ABS) and engine drag torque
maximum lateral acceleration.
control system (MSR). – Direction of travel
– PSM actively stabilises the vehicle in the event
Caution! of under and oversteering during dynamic – Lateral acceleration
driving maneuvres (e.g. rapid steering move- – Longitudinal acceleration
In spite of the advantages of PSM, it is still the driv- ments, during lane changes or on alternating
er’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and bends). – Rate of turn about the vertical axis
maneuvres in line with road and weather condi-
tions, as well as the traffic situation. – Improved braking stability on bends and on dif- PSM uses these values to determine the direction
ferent or varying road surfaces. of travel desired by the driver.
The increased safety that is provided should not in- PSM intervenes and corrects the course if the ac-
duce you to take greater risks with your safety. tual direction of motion deviates from the desired
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be course (steering-wheel position):
overcome, even with PSM. It brakes individual wheels as needed. If neces-
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed sary, PSM additionally influences the engine power
cannot be reduced by PSM. or the gear-changing characteristic of the Tiptron-
ic in order to stabilise the vehicle.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
214 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
The events below inform the driver of PSM control Combined use of PSM and PTM/PTM Plus Off-road PSM
operations and warn him to adapt his driving style (PSM in Low Range program)
In order to ensure optimal stabilisation of the
to the road conditions:
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– The information light in the instrument panel
vehicle, the center differential lock (PTM) and
possibly the rear differential lock (PTM Plus) are
When Low Range is active, an off-road PSM
specially matched to off-road driving is activated
lights up. also opened when PSM interventions occur. to enhance traction.
– Hydraulic noises can be heard. Tip on driving At a speed below 22 mph (35 km/h), the terrain
PSM intervenes later if the vehicle should under-
– The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
When PSM is switched off, wheel-specific brake steer and thereby improves steerability in Low
forces are altered as the PSM controls the
interventions and the traction control system Range.
brakes.
(TCS) are also inactive. If the brakes are highly stressed, the automatic
– Reduced engine power. The automatic brake differential (ABD) remains on. brake differential (ABD) switches itself off to
– The brake pedal pulsates and its position is protect the brakes. It remains deactivated until the
changed during braking. brake system has cooled sufficiently.
However, it is possible at any time to achieve
full vehicle deceleration by increasing the foot Engine drag torque control
pressure slightly. In conditions of excessive slip, the engine drag
torque control system prevents all driven wheels
Examples of PSM control operations from locking up when the car is overrunning. This
– Vehicle understeers: is also the case for downshifts on a slippery road.
If the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a
bend, engine power is reduced and the rear
wheel on the inside of the bend is braked if
necessary.
– Vehicle oversteers:
If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
braked.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 215
PSM should always be switched on during Collapsible spare wheel
“normal” driving.
f Never switch the PSM off when driving with a
WWW.MANUALS.WS
However, it can be of advantage to switch off PSM
temporarily in exceptional situations:
collapsible spare wheel.
– When “rocking the vehicle free” f Please observe the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 340.
– When using snow chains.
When the PSM is switched off the slip monitoring Tip on driving
function of the Tiptronic is also deactivated. When PSM is switched off, wheel-specific brake in-
terventions and the traction control system (TCS)
Information light are also inactive.
– The light indicates a control operation, includ- The automatic brake differential (ABD) remains on.
ing when PSM is switched off (brake control in
the event of one-sided wheel spin). Switching on PSM
Warning light f Press button A.
Switching off PSM PSM is switched on after a short delay.
– The warning light in the instrument panel lights
f Press button A. up in combination with the indicator light in the
PSM is switched off after a short delay. button for a lamp check when the ignition is
With PSM switched off, the PSM warning light switched on.
in the instrument panel and the information – Together with the information light in the
light in the button are lit. button, the warning light indicates that PSM is
During braking, the vehicle is stabilised even switched off.
when PSM is switched off. – A fault is indicated by the warning light in the
One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented, instrument panel and an indication on the multi-
even with PSM switched off. purpose display of the instrument panel. PSM
is out of order.
Please have the fault remedied at an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
216 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
ABS Function Warning light
(Anti-lock Brake System) The decisive advantage of ABS is in the driving If the ABS warning lights light up in the instrument
Caution!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
stability and maneuvrability of the vehicle in
hazardous situations, even during heavy braking
panel and on the multi-purpose display of the in-
strument panel while the engine is running, the
In spite of the advantages of ABS, it is still the driv- while cornering. ABS has switched off because of a fault.
er’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and In this event, the braking system will operate with-
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during full
maneuvres in line with road and weather condi- out lock prevention,as in cars without ABS.
braking, on almost all road surfaces, until shortly
tions, as well as the traffic situation. before the vehicle stops. f Adapt your driving style to the changed brak-
The increased safety that is provided should not in- ing behavior.
The ABS begins to control the braking process as
duce you to take greater risks with your safety. The ABS must be checked immediately at an
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be authorized Porsche dealer in order to prevent
This controlled braking process is comparable to
overcome, even with ABS. the occurrence of further faults the effects of
extremely rapid cadence braking.
Risks of accident due to inappropriate speed can- which cannot be defined.
The pulsating brake pedal and a “rattling noise”
not be reduced by ABS. warn the driver to adapt his driving speed to the The ABS control unit is adjusted for the approved
road conditions. tire dimensions.
ABS ensures The use of tires with non-approved dimensions can
lead to different wheel speeds, causing the ABS to
– Full steering control
switch off.
The vehicle remains steerable
f f f
– Good driving stability
No skidding due to locked wheels
– Optimum braking distance
Shorter stopping distances in most cases
– Lock prevention
No flat spots on the tires
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 217
Off-road ABS Hillholder Safety notes!
(ABS in Low Range program)
In spite of the advantages of the hillholder func-
When Low Range is active, an ABS specially WWW.MANUALS.WS
matched to off-road driving is activated automati-
In selector lever positions D and M, the Hillholder
function makes it easier to move off from a stand-
still on an upward slope when the engine is
tion, it is still the driver’s responsibility to adapt his
driving style and maneuvers in line with situational
cally. conditions.
running. The driver does not have to apply the
The increased safety that is provided should not in-
At speeds below 30 mph (50 km/h), the front brake.
duce you to take greater risks with your safety.
wheels can lock up in cycles during braking to
The hillholder thus makes moving off on slopes The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be
shorten the braking distance when the vehicle is
easier. overcome, even with the hillholder function.
driven off-road (the wheels dig in to the surface).
Driving at the limits should be avoided, e.g., on icy
If the driver needs to steer, this off-road driving
Warning! slopes or on slippery surfaces. In this and similar
program is automatically switched off briefly to
cases, the support of the hillholder function is not
maintain steerability. Risk of accident.
ensured.
The vehicle can roll backwards if the Hillhold-
er is switched off.
f Always apply the footbrake on slopes.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
218 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Engine Braking Support Conditions: Checks on test stands
(Assistance when heading downhill) – The accelerator pedal must not be used when
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The Porsche Down-Hill Assistant is an assistance
system which helps the driver at slower downhill
travelling downhill.
Power measurement
Power measurements on roller test stands are not
– The speed must not approved by Porsche.
driving up to approx. 12 mph (20 km/h), e.g., on exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).
steep slopes or on wintry mountain roads. Brake tests
– The selector lever position D or M must be
As long as the accelerator pedal is not used when engaged. Brake tests must be carried out only in High Range
traveling downhill, the Porsche Down-Hill Assistant and on plate-type test stands or roller test stands.
is active and brakes the vehicle. Tip on driving
The following limit values must not be exceeded
The braking ability of the Engine Braking Support The Porsche Down-Hill Assistant is active when dri- on roller test stands:
is affected by slippery surfaces (e.g., on icy or ving downhill either forwards or backwards.
loose surfaces), like all brakes. – Testing speed 4.7 mph (7.5 km/h)
If road grip is lost on one or more wheels, the – Test duration 20 seconds
system brakes the wheels which have good road
Parking brake test
contact.
Parking brake tests on the brake tester must be
Warning! performed only with the ignition switched off and
the selector lever in position N.
Risk of accident. Reduced braking ability on
a slippery surface. Balancing wheels on the vehicle
f Always adjust your driving style to the driving During finish balancing of the wheels, the entire ve-
situation hicle must be lifted and the wheels must be free to
turn.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 219
Off-Road Driving Maintenance note f Always drive with the engine running.
Steering assistance is provided only with the
Please bear in mind that off-road driving subjects
f Please read this chapter carefully before dri-
ving off road with your Porsche. WWW.MANUALS.WS
all vehicle components to considerably more wear
than normal use, making professional inspection
engine running.
f Drive slowly and uniformly.
The information provided will familiarise you with and maintenance after each use a vital precondi-
f Always make sure that the wheels touch the
the special advantages of your vehicle, allowing tion for functioning and safety.
ground.
you to arrive at your destination safely every time.
Grains of sand, dirt particles and other abrasive
f Before driving through water, check the water
We recommend practicing on less rugged terrain. materials entering the brakes can cause exces-
depth, the condition of the surface beneath it
sive wear or unpredictable braking action.
Vehicles with SportDesign package and the speed of the water.
Rules for off-road driving f Look out for obstacles such as boulders,
Warning! holes, tree stumps or ruts.
Risk of damage. On vehicles with f Ensure vehicle is equipped with approved all- f Always keep the sliding/lifting roof or
SportDesign package, front, rear, and side terrain tires. Panorama roof system and the side windows
member trim are painted and pulled down f Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA- closed while driving.
lower. Off-road driving can seriously damage RANCE” on Page 355. f Do not depart from marked routes or paths.
these trim parts.
f Activate Low Range. f Respect nature.
f When driving off-road, make sure these parts
are not damaged. f Stow or fasten luggage and loads securely. Always obey off-limits signs.
Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR-
f Make sure there is sufficient clearance MATION” on Page 191.
between obstacles and the underside of the
vehicle. f If unknown terrain is obscured from view, ex-
amine it on foot first and traverse it with ex-
f Avoid driving through water. treme caution.
f Do not use side member trim as a running This way, obstacles are easier to recognise
board. and damage to the vehicle is avoided.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
220 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Driving systems for off-road driving After driving off road f Clean the tire tread with a jet of water and re-
move any foreign objects.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Specially adapted driving programs or power-
transmission and running-gear control systems
are available for off-road driving:
Off-road driving places a greater burden on the ve-
hicle than does normal driving on roads.
f Clean wheels, wheel housings and the under-
body with a jet of water.
We recommend inspecting the vehicle after off-
f Check whether the car has picked up plant
– Off-road program Low Range road driving. Potential damage poses an accident
parts or branches.
risk and impairs driving comfort. Damage on the
– Off-road PSM These materials increase the risk of fire and
car is recognised in good time if the car is
can damage fuel lines, brake hoses, boots of
– Off-road ABS checked.
the axle joints and drive shafts.
– Center differential lock
Warning! f After off-road driving, always check the entire
– Rear differential lock floor assembly, tires, body structure, steering
Car damage poses an accident risk for the
system, running gear and exhaust system for
f Please observe the chapter “POWER-TRANS- vehicle occupants and other road users.
signs of damage.
MISSION AND RUNNING-GEAR CONTROL SYS-
f In cases of doubt, have your vehicle checked
TEMS” on Page 211. f After driving for an extended period through
by your authorized Porsche dealer.
mud, sand, water or substances with a similar
Before driving off f Examine tires for signs of damage such as soiling effect, check the brake discs, brake
cuts, tears, bulges or foreign objects stuck in pads, wheels and axle joints and have them
Tires the tread. Replace a damaged tire if necessa- cleaned.
ry.
f Check tread depth and tire pressure. f If you experience severe vibrations after
f Have any damage to your vehicle repaired by driving off road, check the wheels for foreign
f Check for damage and remove any foreign ob-
an authorized Porsche dealer without delay. substances.
jects (e.g. stones) from the tread.
These substances can produce an imbalance
f Replace missing valve caps. which might be responsible for the vibrations.
Recommended procedure
Removing these deposits may remedy the
Rims f Deactivate Low Range. problem.
f Replace dented or damaged rims before f Clean headlights and tail lights and check them
driving off road. for signs of damage.
f Clean the front and rear licence plates.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 221
Uphill driving Note on operation Traction on uphill slopes
f Activate Low Range before taking extreme up-
Danger!
Danger of serious personal injury or death
WWW.MANUALS.WS
ward or downward gradients.
Note on operation
f Activate Low Range and engage differential
and risk of damage if the vehicle should Tips on driving locks if necessary.
overturn. f Do not perform manual gear changes when
Tips on driving
f Do not turn around when driving uphill. driving, and try to avoid stopping.
f When driving uphill, go easy on the accelerator
f If it is not possible to climb a gradient, the car f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
and make sure that wheels have sufficient trac-
must be backed down in reverse gear. tion (don't spin).
f Do not drive over embankments or slopes at f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
an angle to the line of maximum gradient.
f Drive slowly.
f If the vehicle starts to tilt, immediately steer in
the direction of the tilt (line of slope).
f When driving uphill, never let the vehicle roll
backward when in idle or not in gear.
Exclusive use of the footbrake is too risky in
such situations.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
222 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Driving downhill Note on operation
f Activate Low Range. The off-road ABS is
Danger!
There is a danger of serious personal injury
WWW.MANUALS.WS
switched on automatically.
f Use engine braking effect. f When driving down steep hills on unpaved sur-
If the engine braking effect is not adequate, faces, brake carefully and do not start to slide.
gently apply the foot brake.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 223
Danger! Soiling can impair the braking action.
Danger of drowning if water enters the vehi- f Check and clean the brakes if they have been
WWW.MANUALS.WS
cle. Risk of damage to the engine and acces-
sories if water penetrates.
soiled.
Danger of steering assistance failing during
f Before driving through water, check the water a long journey in the water if the drive belt
depth A, water speed and the condition of the slips.
surface beneath it.
f If the steering assistance fails, more effort will
The water must not be deeper than 22 in. or
be required to steer.
55.5 cm.
Danger of damaging electrical systems
f Check the door sills and rubber seals before
starting to drive. f Avoid driving through salt water.
f Do not drive through deep or rapidly flowing
water. Notes on operation
Deep or rapidly flowing water, e.g. mountain f Activate Low Range.
streams, can cause the car to deviate from the
intended path. f Switch the air conditioner off.
Water crossing f Avoid a "bow wave" by driving at an appropriate f Switch the headlights off.
f Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA- speed.
RANCE” on Page 355. f Never open the doors when driving through wa-
ter.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
224 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Tips on driving Maintenance note Humps
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm). The car requires a special check after the water
f Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA-
f Do not perform manual gear changes when
driving, and try to avoid stopping.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
crossing.
f Remove mud from the tire tread.
RANCE” on Page 355.
f After checking the body of water, take the f Just before reaching the hump, ease off the ac-
shortest path through it. celerator slightly and use the car's momentum
to cross the hump. This will prevent the car
f Never drive into the water at high speed. The from jumping over the hump and landing on the
resulting “bow wave” could damage the engine following downward slope at an excessive
and its accessories. speed.
f Adjust your driving style to the unfamiliar sur- f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
roundings.
f Cross the body of water slowly and at a con-
stant speed.
f Never turn around when crossing a body of wa-
ter.
f If it is not possible to cross the body of water,
the car must be backed out of it in reverse
gear.
The servo pump and alternator can fail if the car is
driven through water for an extended period.
f If the servo pump fails, substantially more
force will have to be exerted in order to steer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 225
Crossing obstacles
Caution!
Risk of damage to the underbody and chas-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
sis components if obstacles are traversed
improperly.
f Always bear in mind the ground clearance of
your vehicle.
f Slowly drive over the middle of tree trunks,
boulders or other obstacles with one of the
front wheels.
f Cross the obstacle with the rear wheel in the
same way.
Note on operation
f Activate Low Range and engage differential Tips on driving
locks if necessary.
f Have your passenger direct you if necessary.
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
f Drive slowly.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
226 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Driving on sand When driving on slopes with soft sand: Track ruts
f Use the manual select mode M in addition to
Note on operation
f Activate Low Range and engage differential
WWW.MANUALS.WS
the Low Range program.
Other vehicles leave ruts in many off-road courses
or gravel roads.
If your vehicle becomes stuck nevertheless:
locks if necessary. f Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA-
f Do not spin the wheels. Instead, use branches, RANCE” on Page 355.
Tips on driving mats or similar items to provide adequate trac-
Loose sand is an especially tricky surface for off- tion so that you can drive out of the critical ar- Caution!
road driving. ea.
Risk of damage to the vehicle floor when
You can often become stuck in sand within driving through ruts that are too deep.
minutes if you do not drive correctly in such f Always bear in mind the car's ground clear-
situations. ance.
f Drive at brisk pace and do not stop under any f Do not drive over ruts that are too deep.
circumstances. This will reduce the chance of
the car becoming bogged down.
Note on operation
f Follow existing tracks – provided that they
have not been covered by blown sand, are not f Activate Low Range and engage differential
too deep and the car's ground clearance is locks if necessary.
sufficient.
Tips on driving
Please observe the chapter “GROUND CLEA-
RANCE” on Page 355. f In cases of doubt, drive with one wheel on the
strip of grass.
f Avoid high engine speeds (may. 2,500 rpm).
f Avoid high engine speeds (max. 2,500 rpm).
f Drive slowly.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 227
Note on operation Special terrain level
Frequent level changes can cause the compressor
WWW.MANUALS.WS
to overheat. In this case, the compressor must
cool for several minutes before the level adjust-
This setting is intended only for extremely chal-
lenging terrain requiring maximum ground clear-
ance. The vehicle is raised by 2.2 in or 56 mm
ment is fully functional again.
compared to normal level.
Tip on driving
It is not permissible to drive on public roads with
the car in the terrain or special terrain setting.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
228 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Loading level Setting level manually Raising the vehicle
Caution!
Risk of damage to running-gear parts, units
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Preconditions
– Ignition on.
1st actuation: Terrain level
Exceptions
Automatic changes from normal level to low level
and back are not indicated on the multi-purpose
display of the instrument panel.
Note on operation f f f
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 229
Lowering the vehicle f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS Raising vehicle with the jack
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 106.
1st actuation: Low level
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Adapt your driving behavior to the changed
conditions.
Whenever it is necessary to jack up the vehicle:
f Manually set normal level and then switch off
level control.
f Consult an authorized Porsche dealer in order
to remedy a system fault. Switching off level control
f If the overload-protection function causes the 1. Switch ignition on.
compressor to switch off, wait for a time until
it has cooled down. The system will function 2. Push rocker switch forward for 5 to
again as soon as it has cooled sufficiently. 10 seconds.
A message is shown on the multi-purpose
The warning message appears when the control display of the instrument panel.
system is switched off and when the collapsible The vehicle can now be raised.
2nd actuation: Loading level spare wheel is being filled. This does not indicate
a fault. Switching level control back on
The warning message will go out once these pro-
1. Switch ignition on.
cedures have been completed.
2. Push rocker switch forward for 5 to
10 seconds or
3. Drive forward with the vehicle.
Level control switches on automatically.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
230 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Porsche Active Suspension Indication of the selected running-gear
Management (PASM) setup
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Various messages are shown on the multi-purpose The light-emitting diode in the button of the select-
ed running-gear setup is lit.
display of the instrument panel.
In addition, the selected running-gear setup is indi-
Three different running-gear setups can be select- cated on the multi-purpose display of the instru-
ed with the push of a button: ment panel for around 12 seconds.
– Comfort
– Normal
Warning message
– Sport If there is a system fault a warning message is
shown on the multi-purpose display of the instru-
If the running-gear setups “comfort” or “normal” ment panel.
have been selected, the system automatically
changes the setup to “sport” when the car is driv- f Adapt your driving style to the changed condi-
en in a sporty manner. tions.
f To remedy the fault, consult an authorized
Porsche dealer. Selecting the running-gear setup
1. Switch ignition on.
2. Press the appropriate button.
Note on operation
The running-gear setup selected last is stored in
memory after the ignition is switched off.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Shifting Gear, Traction Systems 231
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
232 Shifting Gear, Traction Systems
Maintenance, Car Care
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle .......................................... 234
Engine Oil Level ......................................... 236
Engine Oil Recommendation........................ 238
Coolant Level............................................. 240
Brake-Fluid Level ........................................ 242
Washer Fluid .............................................. 243
Power Steering .......................................... 244
Air Cleaner ................................................ 245
Particle Filter ............................................. 245
Automatic Transmission Fluid ...................... 245
Wiper Blades ............................................. 246
Fuel Economy ............................................ 249
Operating Your Porsche in other Countries... 249
Fuel........................................................... 250
Fuel Recommendations............................... 252
Portable Fuel Containers............................. 253
Fuel Evaporation Control............................. 253
Emission Control System ............................ 254
Car Care Instructions.................................. 256
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 233
Exercise Extreme Caution when f In particular, be very careful to ensure that f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), jew- problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
Working on your Vehicle
Danger!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
elry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get
caught in the fan, belts or other moving parts.
about any servicing, have it done by your au-
thorized Porsche dealer.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front Improper maintenance during the warranty pe-
Ignoring the following instructions may of the car. riod may affect your Porsche warranty cove-
cause serious personal injury or death. The fans can start or continue running as a rage.
function of temperature, even with the engine
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, washer fluid,
switched off.
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not brake fluid or coolant, are hazardous to your
Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do health.
gine off and exercise extreme caution.
not attempt the adjustments described on the Keep these fluids out of children's reach and
following pages. f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig- dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
This caution applies to the entire vehicle. nition system. When the ignition is on, high volt- priate regulations.
age is present in all wires connected with the
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well f Some countries require additional tools and
ignition system; therefore, exercise extreme
ventilated area. special spare parts to be carried.
caution when working on any part of the engine
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the while the ignition is on or the engine is running.
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel f Always support your car with safety stands if it
fumes might be present. Be especially cau- is necessary to work under the car. The jack Power measurements
tious of such devices such as hot water heat- supplied with the car is not adequate for this
ers which ignite a flame intermittently. purpose. Power measurements on dynamometers are not
approved by Porsche.
f Before working on any part in the engine com- f When working under the car without safety
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool stands but with the wheels on the ground,
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment make sure the car is on level ground, the
components can burn skin on contact. wheels are blocked, and that the engine can-
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all not be started.
times while the engine is running. Withdraw ignition keys (switch ignition off in ve-
If work has to be performed with the engine hicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive).
running, always set the parking brake, and f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
make sure the selector lever is in position “P“ the battery or fuel.
or “N“. Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
234 Maintenance, Car Care
Radiator fans Engine Oil If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed, cli-
matic conditions are warm, and the load is high,
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 235
Engine Oil Level Oil-level warning Checking the oil level
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR WWW.MANUALS.WS
If the oil level is too low, this is indicated by the oil-
level warning light lighting up on the multi-purpose
Warning!
Danger of injury. The radiator fans can start
VEHICLE” on Page 234.
display. running as a function of temperature, even
f Please observe the chapter “WARNING LIGHTS
f Check the oil level using the oil dipstick as with the engine switched off.
AND WARNING MESSAGES” on Page 106. Risk of burning from hot parts in engine com-
soon as possible and add engine oil if neces-
f Check the oil level regularly. It is best to do this sary. partment.
when refuelling and before extended journeys. f Exercise extreme caution when working on the
Note on operation engine compartment.
Warning! f If the engine compartment lid is opened and oil
Engine oil is hazardous to your health and is not added, the warning message appears Conditions for measuring the oil level
may be fatal if swallowed. again after approximately 62 miles (100 km). correctly
f Keep engine oil out of children's reach. – Vehicle must be level.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have – Engine must be switched off and at operating
caused cancer in laboratory animals. temperature.
f Always protect your skin by washing thorough- – Before the oil-level measurement, allow the en-
ly with soap and water. gine oil to flow back into the oil pan for around
3 minutes.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
236 Maintenance, Car Care
1. Unscrew cap of the oil filler opening.
2. Add engine oil carefully.
WWW.MANUALS.WS 3. Measure oil level again after a few minutes.
Never exceed the MAX mark on the oil
dipstick.
4. Push oil dipstick in as far as the stop.
5. Carefully close cap of the oil filler opening.
Checking oil level with the oil dipstick Topping off engine oil
1. Withdraw oil dipstick and wipe it with a clean,
lint-free cloth. Caution!
2. Push oil dipstick fully home, withdraw again Fire hazard if engine oil comes into contact
and read off the oil level. with hot engine parts.
The oil level must never fall below or ex- Risk of damage if engine oil comes into con-
ceed the “Min.” and “Max.” marks on the tact with the drive belt.
dipstick. f Exercise great care when adding engine oil.
The difference between the marks is approx.
1.6 qt or 1.5 liters.
3. Push oil dipstick in as far as the stop.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 237
Engine Oil Recommendation
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Recommended oil viscosity ranges dependent on ambient temperatures:
WWW.MANUALS.WS
238 Maintenance, Car Care
Oil change If your vehicle is used frequently in stop-and-go Viscosity
traffic in cold weather, the engine will not always
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 239
Coolant Level
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR WWW.MANUALS.WS
VEHICLE” on Page 234.
The coolant provides year-round protection from
corrosion and freezing down to -31°F/-35°C
(Nordic countries -40°F/-40°C).
f Use only anti-freeze authorized by Porsche.
f Check the coolant level regularly.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
240 Maintenance, Car Care
Checking the coolant level when a warning 1. Remove cover. Maintenance note
messages is shown on the multi-purpose
2. If the engine is hot, cover the the expansion If in an emergency pure water has been added, the
display of the instrument panel
WWW.MANUALS.WS
tank cap with a cloth.
Open cap carefully and allow any overpressure
mixture ratio must be corrected at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Warning! to escape.
Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
Danger of serious personal injury from scald- Then unscrew cap completely.
cooling system.
ing. Coolant is hazardous to your health, and 3. Read the coolant level. The cause should be remedied at an authorized
may be fatal if swallowed. Top up with coolant if necessary. Porsche dealer immediately.
f Do not open the cap of the expansion tank Only add a mixture of anti-freeze and water in
while the engine is hot. equal parts.
Antifreeze in coolant:
f Allow the engine to cool down before opening 50% provides anti-freeze protection down to
the cap and protect your hands, arms and face -31°F/-35°C.
from any possible escape of hot coolant. Do not exceed the max. mark.
f Keep coolant out of children's reach.
Note on operation
f Also, keep coolant away from your pets.They
can be attracted to it should there be a spill, or f If the coolant level exceeds the max. mark
to used coolant left in an open container. Cool- when the engine is hot, check the coolant level
ant can be deadly to pets if consumed. again when the engine is cold.
4. Screw the cap closed firmly and put on the
cover.
5. Have the cooling system checked by an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 241
Brake-Fluid Level
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR WWW.MANUALS.WS
VEHICLE” on Page 234.
f Use only new (unused) Original Porsche brake
fluid.
Warning!
Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and
may be fatal if swallowed.
Brake fluid also attacks paintwork.
f Keep brake fluid out of children's reach.
f Immediately rinse off spilled brake fluid with
clean water.
f If brake fluid gets into your eye, immediately A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and
Checking the brake-fluid level
rinse with clean water for a few minutes. Then automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
see a doctor immediately. The reservoir for the hydraulic braking system is normal.
f Please note all the information on the refill located in the engine compartment. If, however, the fluid level falls markedly or below
container of the brake fluid. the MIN mark, the braking system may have devel-
1. Rotate the turn-locks 90° counterclockwise oped a leak.
(arrow) with a screwdriver and remove the
cover. f Please have the braking system checked im-
mediately at an authorized Porsche dealer.
2. Check brake-fluid level at the transparent res-
ervoir.
The fluid level should always lie between the
MIN and MAX marks.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
242 Maintenance, Car Care
Changing the brake fluid Topping off washer fluid
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
time. This accumulation of water lowers the boil-
ing point and, under certain operating conditions,
The capacity is approx. 7.9 quarts or 7.5 liters.
Clean water is generally not enough to clean the
windows and headlights.
can affect the braking action.
It is advantageous to add a winter cleaner giving
f Therefore, have the brake fluid changed in ac- antifreeze protection or a suitable summer clean-
cordance with the change intervals stated in er, depending on the season. Follow the instruc-
the booklet “Maintenance”. tions for the mixture ratio.
f Use only cleaner authorized by Porsche.
Brake fluid warning light
USA 1. Please note all the information on the refill
container of the cleaning agent.
Brake fluid warning light
Canada 2. Open cap of the washer-fluid reservoir.
The warning light in the instrument panel and the 3. Top up washer fluid and close cap properly.
warning message on the multi-purpose display of f Do not use engine coolant anti-freeze or any
the instrument panel
Washer Fluid other solution that can damage the car’s paint,
– indicate the brake level fluid is too low or, in the washer reservoir.
The washer-fluid reservoir for windshield, rear win-
– in conjunction with large pedal travel could dow and headlights is located in the engine com-
indicate a braking-circuit failure. partment.
Note on operation
Warning message on the multi-purpose
f Stop immediately in a suitable place. display
f Do not continue driving.
A message is shown on the multi-purpose display
Please have the fault remedied at your nearest
of the instrument panel if the washer-fluid level is
authorized Porsche dealer.
too low.
In this case, the residual quantity is only around
0.85 quarts or 0.8 liters.
f Add washer fluid at the next opportunity.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 243
Checking hydraulic fluid
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
WWW.MANUALS.WS EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR
VEHICLE” on Page 234.
f Only use genuine Porsche hydraulic fluid or a
hydraulic fluid of similar quality which has been
approved according the Porsche specifica-
tions and product requirements.
f Check the fluid level with the engine stopped
and cold (engine temperature approx. 68° F or
20°C).
1. Remove cover A.
2. Open the reservoir cap.
3. The fluid level should lie between the MIN and
The flow noise heard at full steering lock is design- MAX marks on the dipstick.
Power Steering Add hydraulic fluid if necessary.
related and does not indicate a defect in the steer-
ing system. 4. Close cap carefully.
Warning!
Risk of accident. When the engine is station- 5. Put on cover A.
ary (e.g. when on tow) or the hydraulic sys- 6. Close engine compartment lid.
tem fails, there is no assistance for steering.
Therefore, substantially more force will have f If the fluid level drops significantly, please have
to be exerted. the cause remedied immediately by an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
f Exercise great care when on tow.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
244 Maintenance, Car Care
Air Cleaner Particle Filter Automatic Transmission Fluid
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR WWW.MANUALS.WS
The fresh air passing through the particle filter into
the passenger compartment is virtually free of
The torque converter and the transmission are lu-
bricated with Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF).
VEHICLE” on Page 234. dust and pollen.
f Please observe the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Regular replacement of the filter element is part of f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes, Page 351.
servicing. press the circulating-air button.
Do not tow the car or run the engine without ATF
f In dusty conditions, clean the filter element A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air in the transmission. The automatic transmission
more frequently and replace if necessary. throughput. may be damaged by even a tiny speck of dirt, only
a clean funnel or spout must be used when adding
f Have filter replaced by your authorized
ATF.
Porsche dealer.
The ATF and transmission oil has to be checked
Regular replacement of the filter is part of servic-
and changed at the intervals listed in your Mainte-
ing.
nance Schedule.
We recommend that you have the ATF and trans-
mission oil changed at your Porsche dealer, who
has the required lubricants and the necessary fill-
ing equipment.
If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission, have
your authorized Porsche dealer check it out imme-
diately.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 245
Wiper Blades Replacing windshield wiper blades
f When wiper performance deteriorates, replace
the wiper blades in good time. WWW.MANUALS.WS
Caution!
Risk of damage.
f Please observe the chapter “CAR CARE IN- If the wiper blades are not changed properly,
STRUCTIONS” on Page 256. they can come loose when the car is moving.
f Check whether the wiper blades are seated se-
Caution!
curely.
Risk of damage if wiper arm accidentally The wiper blade must be pushed onto the wip-
falls back onto the windshield. er arm up to the stop.
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when re-
placing the wiper blade.
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are
frozen in place are loosened improperly.
f Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them.
1. Apply the parking brake.
Maintenance note
2. Switch the windshield wipers off (position 0).
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
result of the following: 3. Switch ignition off.
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car 4. Fold windshield wiper arm away from the wind-
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield. shield.
These residues can only be removed using a 5. Lift up wiper blade completely (arrow).
special cleaning solution.
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
f Replace wiper blades as soon as possible.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
246 Maintenance, Car Care
Note on operation
f Make sure that the wiper blade is pushed onto
WWW.MANUALS.WS the wiper arm up to the stop.
9. Fit cap A again.
10.Fold wiper blade back to its original position.
11.Carefully fold wiper arm back on to the wind-
screen.
6. Unclip cap A 7. Pull off wiper blade toward the windscreen (ar-
row).
8. Push on the new wiper blade.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 247
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Switch ignition off.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
3. Carefully fold the wiper arm away from the rear
window until it reaches its locking position
(approx. 60°).
4. Carefully unclip the wiper blade from the wiper
arm (arrow). Hold the wiper arm with your
other hand when doing this.
5. Push the new wiper blade onto the center of
the wiper arm and snap it into place.
6. Carefully fold wiper arm back on to the rear
window.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
248 Maintenance, Car Care
Fuel Economy f Switch off the engine if stationary for longer Operating Your Porsche in other
periods.
Countries
Fuel economy will vary depending on where,
when and how you drive, optional equipment WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Any additional weight carried in the vehicle re-
duces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a Government regulations in the United States and
installed, and the general condition of your Canada require that automobiles meet specific
minimum and remove all unnecessary items.
car. emission regulations and safety standards. There-
A car tuned to specifications and correctly f Organize your trips to take in several errands fore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from
maintained, will help you to achieve optimal in one trip. vehicles sold in other countries.
fuel economy.
f All electrical accessories contribute to in- If you plan to take your Porsche outside the conti-
f Have your vehicle tuned to specifications. Air creased fuel consumption. nental limits of the United States or Canada, there
cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper en-
f Only switch on the air conditioning when neces- is the possibility that
gine “breathing“.
sary. – unleaded fuel may not be available;
Battery should be fully charged.
Wheels should be properly aligned. f Do not drive with the Roof Transport System – unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
Tires should be inflated at correct pressure. mounted unless you need it. octane rating. Excessive engine knock and se-
f Always monitor your fuel consumption. The EPA estimated m.p.g. is to be used for rious damage to both engine and catalytic con-
comparison purposes, actual mileage may verters could result;
f Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
be different from the estimated m.p.g., de- – service may be inadequate due to lack of prop-
as much as possible.
pending on your driving speed, weather con- er service facilities, tools or diagnostic equip-
f Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops. ditions and trip length. Your actual highway ment;
mileage will probably be less than the esti-
f Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower – replacement parts may not be available or very
mated m.p.g.
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without difficult to get.
lugging the engine will help save fuel. f Please observe all local and national speed lim-
its. Porsche cannot be responsible for the me-
f Prolonged “warm up“ idling wastes gas. Start chanical damage that could result because
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive. of inadequate fuel, service or parts availabil-
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. ity.
If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
bring it back home, be sure to find out about ship-
ping and forwarding requirements, as well as cur-
rent import and customs regulations.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 249
Fuel
Warning!
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
WWW.MANUALS.WS
health.
f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
f Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
f Do not inhale fuel vapours.
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine:
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
Filler flap Fuel quality label
f Please observe the chapter “HOW EMISSION
CONTROL WORKS” on Page 255. The filler flap is located in the rear right wing and Opening
is electrically opened with pull-button A in the driv-
f Please observe the chapter “LEVEL GAUGE” f Operate pull-button A in the driver's door.
er's door.
on Page 74. The filler flap pops open.
The pull-button is also ready for operation when
To avoid permanent damage to the functionality of the ignition is switched off. Closing
the catalytic converters and oxygen sensors, use
only unleaded fuel. f Close the filler flap until it clicks shut.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
252 Maintenance, Car Care
Fuels containing MMT Portable Fuel Containers Fuel Evaporation Control
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Some North American fuels contain an octane en-
hancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Danger!
Portable fuel containers, full or partially
Fuel tank venting
The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
empty, may leak causing an explosion, or re-
If such fuels are used, your emission control sys- prevent fuel from escaping to the atmosphere at
sult in fire in case of an accident.
tem performance may be negatively affected. extreme high outside temperatures, when driving
f Never carry additional fuel in portable contain- abruptly around curves and when the car is parked
The check engine warning light on your instrument
ers in your vehicle. at an incline or in any other nonlevel position.
panel may turn on.
If this occurs, Porsche recommends you stop us-
ing fuels containing MMT. Vapor control system and storage
When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
vapors to the carbon canister where they are
stored as long as the engine does not run.
Purge system
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be di-
rected to the intake air housing by the tank vent
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
normal combustion.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 253
Emission Control System To assure efficient operation of the Emission Parking
Control System:
Porsche has developed an emission control sys- f Do not alter or remove any component of the f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
tem that controls or reduces those parts of the emission control system. the fire department. Do not endanger your life
emission that can be harmful to our environment. by attempting to put out the fire.
f Do not alter or remove any device, such as
Your Porsche is equipped with such a system.
heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves,
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in etc., which are designed to protect your vehi- Undercoating
your new car under the terms and conditions set cle's emission control system. In addition to
forth in the Warranty Booklet. serious engine damage, this can result in a fire Danger!
if excess raw fuel reaches the exhaust system.
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the respon- Danger of fire and serious personal injuries
sibility to provide regular maintenance service for f Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you or death.
the vehicle and to keep a record of all mainte- detect engine misfire or other unusual operat-
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
nance work performed. To facilitate record keep- ing conditions.
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, ex-
ing, have the service performed by authorized
haust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained tech-
shields. During driving the substance used for
nicians and special tools to provide fast and effi-
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
cient service.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
254 Maintenance, Car Care
How Emission Control Works Oxygen sensor The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
– push or tow starting the vehicle
WWW.MANUALS.WS
When an automobile engine is running, it uses en-
ergy generated through the combustion of a mix-
The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe
continuously senses the oxygen content of the ex-
haust and signals the information to an electronic
– misfiring of the engine
ture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a car is
– turning off the ignition while the vehicle is mov-
driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold control unit. The control unit corrects the air/fuel
ing or
or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) may not ratio, so the engine always receives an accurately
be burned completely, but may be discharged into metered air/fuel mixture. – driving until the fuel tank is completely empty
the engine crankcase or exhaust system. Additon-
– by other unusual operating conditions.
al hydrocarbons may enter the atmosphere Crankcase ventilation
through evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank. f Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
These hydrocarbons (HC), when released into the Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable emis- these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
air, contribute to undesirable pollution. sions from the engine crankcase are not permit- the catalytic converters. This could result in
ted to reach the outside atmosphere. These emis- overheating of the converters. Federal law pro-
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
sions are recirculated from the crankcase to the hibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions.
They, too, are formed during the combustion pro- air intake system. From here the emissions mix
cess and discharged into the exhaust system. with the intake air and are later burned in the en-
gine.
To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
Catalytic converters
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture
under all operating conditions. The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up“
devices built into the exhaust system of the vehi-
cle. The catalytic converters burn the undesirable
pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is released
into the atmosphere.
The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critical-
ly important for the life of the catalytic con-
verters. Therefore, only unleaded fuel must
be used.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 255
Car Care Instructions Warning! Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect brak-
ing efficiency.
Risk of serious personal injury or damage to
f Please observe the chapter “EXERCISE
EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR WWW.MANUALS.WS
the vehicle or property.
Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your
f Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.
VEHICLE” on Page 234.
health.
Regular and correct care helps to maintain Most chemical cleaners are concentrates
the value of your car and is also a which require dilution. High concentrations
precondition for the New Vehicle Warranty might cause problems ranging from irritation
and the Anti Corrosion Warranty. to serious injury as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially f Keep cleaning agents out of reach from chil-
developed car-care products from the dren.
Porsche program available either singly or
as complete car-care sets. They will be f Observe all caution labels.
pleased to help you select suitable products. f Always read directions on the container before
using any product. These directions may con-
Whether you use Porsche products or other
tain information necessary to avoid personal
commercially available cleaning agents first
injury.
make sure of their correct application.
f Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the
may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
owner is willing to give the car.
ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
vented area.
f Do not clean the underside of chassis, fend-
ers, wheel covers, etc., without protecting
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself
on sharp-edged metal parts.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
256 Maintenance, Car Care
High-pressure cleaning units f Never use high-pressure cleaning units with a f Do not wash your car in bright sunlight or while
round-jet nozzle. the bodywork is still hot.
Warning!
High-pressure cleaning units can damage
WWW.MANUALS.WS
A high-pressure cleaning unit with round nozzle
will damage your vehicle. The tires are particu-
f When washing by hand, use abundant water, a
soft sponge or wash brush and Porsche car
larly susceptible to damage.
the following components: shampoo.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of
– Tires f Begin by spraying the body thoroughly with wa-
the aforementioned components.
ter to rinse away loose dirt.
– Logos, emblems
f After washing, rinse the car with plenty of wa-
– Painted surfaces Washing ter and then dry with a chamois leather.
– Widened fenders Do not use the same chamois leather for
The best protection for the car from the damaging drying as you use for cleaning the windshield
– Lock and latch of the removable towing attach- effects of the environment is frequent washing and and windows.
ment preservation. The underside of the car should also
be thoroughly washed for cinders, salt or sanding f f f
– Seals of the electrically retractable ball hitch
at winter‘s end.
– Alternator, valve covers
The longer salt, road dust, industrial dust, insect
– ParkAssist sensors. remains, bird excrement, and tree exudations (res-
f Please observe the operating instructions from
in, pollen), etc. are allowed to remain on the body-
work, the more serious is their harmful effect.
the unit manufacturer.
f Always cover the lid over the brake fluid reser-
New cars should be washed carefully with plenty
of clear water to protect the new paint work.
voir prior to cleaning. Never point the cleaning
Dark paint finishes show up the smallest of sur-
jet directly at the lid.
face damage (e.g. scratches) more readily than
f When cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or the like, lighter colors.
maintain a minimum distance of 50 cm
Dark colors are also more susceptible to scratch-
(21 in.).
ing because of the composition of their pigments
and require particularly careful paint care.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 257
Warning! The following parts are particularly Door lock
susceptible to damage:
Moisture which gets on to the brakes during
f To prevent the door lock from freezing during
a car wash can reduce braking efficiency or
make the brake pull unevenly which could in-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– Windshield wipers (always switch them off to
prevent them wiping unintentionally in intermit-
the cold season, cover the lock barrel with a
suitable adhesive tape during washing.
crease the danger of an accident, causing tent or sensor operation).
serious personal injuries or death. f Should the locks freeze, use an ordinary de-ic-
– Door mirrors (always fold in).
er.
f Always apply the brakes a few times after
– Roof Transport System (always remove com- In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
washing the car to test braking efficiency and
pletely). Never use excessive force.
dry the brake discs.
When doing this, take care not to hamper other – Spoiler.
road users behind you (traffic conditions per-
– Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire
mitting).
height, the greater the risk of damage).
f Please consult the operator before using
Automatic car washes
automatic car washes.
Optional add-on parts or parts which project be-
yond the contours of the vehicle may be damaged f Wash and dry by hand all points not reached by
by design features (e.g. brushes) of automatic car a car wash, such as door and lid seams or
washes. door sills.
Note
Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its
way into the passengers compartment during or
shortly after the car wash.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
258 Maintenance, Car Care
Paint Preservation Removing spots and stains
The paint surface becomes dull over time due to f Remove tar stains, grease, oil spots and dead
f Never rub a dusty car with a dry cloth since
WWW.MANUALS.WS
dust particles are abrasive and could dull and
damage the surface finish.
weathering. It is therefore necessary to preserve
the paint regularly.
insects etc. as soon as possible with Insect Re-
mover. They can cause discoloration if allowed
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is pre- to remain on the paintwork.
The paintwork of your car is exposed to all types vented from adhering to the paint surface and in-
f Wash the affected area immediately after treat-
of mechanical and chemical conditions, particular- dustrial dust is prevented from penetrating the
ing it.
ly climatic ones such as bright sunlight, rain, frost paint.
and snow. Ultraviolet light, rapid changes in tem- Minor paint damage
Provided it is washed and treated with preserva-
perature, rain, snow, industrial dust and chemical
deposits constantly attack the paint which is only
tive regularly, the brand new finish of your car will f Have minor paint damage, such as scratches,
be retained for years to come. scores or chips caused by flying stones, re-
able to withstand such exposure in the long term
if it is given regular care and attention. f Simply apply paint preservative after washing paired immediately by your authorized
the car and polish it smooth. Porsche dealer before corrosion begins.
f Do not treat matt-painted components with
preservatives or polishes, otherwise the matt However, if there are already traces of corrosion,
Polishing
effect will be lost. they must first be removed carefully and thorough-
f Do not resort to using Porsche polish until it ly. Coat the area with a rust-proofing primer and
becomes evident that the normal preservati- finish off with a top coat. The paint code and color
ves no longer produce the desired finish. number are found on the vehicle’s paint data plate.
f Please observe the chapter “DATA BANK” on
Page 344.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 259
Cleaning the engine compartment Windows Wiper blades
Caution!
Risk of damage, e.g. to the alternator, paint-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The road dust which settles on the windshield and
windows contains particles of tire rubber and oil
residue. The interior trim and upholstery release
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
for a clear view.
ed surfaces, and the valve covers. f Replace the wiper blades twice per year (be-
particles, particularly in strong sunlight, which col-
fore and after the cold season) or whenever
f Never use high-pressure cleaning units with a lect on the insides of the windows. These deposits
wiper performance deteriorates.
round-jet nozzle. are augmented by impurities in the air which en-
ters the car through the fresh air vents. f Periodically clean wiper blades with Porsche
f Always maintain a minimum distance of 50 cm window cleaner, especially after the vehicle
(21 in.). f Clean all windows regularly, inside and outside,
has been washed in a car wash.
with Porsche window cleaner.
f Always cover the lid over the brake fluid reser- If they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
voir prior to cleaning with a high-pressure f Make sure not to damage the TV antenna in the they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
cleaner. Never point the cleaning jet directly at side window when cleaning.
the lid. f If you use a chamois leather for the windows,
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of do not use it for paintwork as it will otherwise
the aforementioned components. pick up a certain amount of preservative or pol-
ish and could smear the windows and thus im-
pair vision.
Note on operation
f Remove dead insects with insect remover.
If the vehicle is driven off-road frequently and after
driving on salted or gritted roads:
f Clean the engine compartment regularly.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
260 Maintenance, Car Care
Undercoating Danger!
Danger of fire and serious personal injuries.
The underside of your car is durably protected
against chemical and mechanical influences. WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, ex-
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage
haust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
to this protective coating in day to day driving, it
shields. During driving the substance used for
is advisable to have the underside of the car in-
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
spected at certain intervals - preferably before the
start of winter and again in spring - and the under-
f Before applying fresh underseal, carefully re-
coating restored as necessary.
move deposits or dirt and grease. Once it has
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the dried, the new undercoating compound forms
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the nec- a tough protective coating which provides effi-
essary equipment for applying factory approved cient rust-proofing of the floor panels and com-
materials. We recommend that you entrust them ponents.
with such work and inspections.
f Always apply a fresh coating of suitable preser-
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and vative to unprotected areas after cleaning the
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or underside of the body, the transmission, the
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials ap- engine or carrying out repairs to under-body,
plied at the factory. engine or transmission components.
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
during the cold weather season. If your car is driv-
en frequently in areas where salt has been spread
on the roads, the whole engine compartment
should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter to
prevent salt from causing any lasting damage. A
full under-body wash should also be performed at
the same time.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 261
Headlights, lights, interior and exterior Door, roof, lid and window seals Light alloy wheels
plastic parts
f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salt or grit) f Please observe the chapter “AUTOMATIC CAR
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Use only clean water and a little dishwashing
detergent to clean headlights, lights, plastic
from all seals regularly using warm soapy wa-
ter. Do not use any chemical cleaning agents
WASHES” on Page 258.
Pitting may occur if metallic particles which cause
parts and surfaces. or solvents.
contact corrosion (e.g. brass or copper in brake
Do not clean when dry.
When there is a frost hazard, the outer door seals dust) are allowed to remain on the aluminum too
Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth.
and the lid seals can be protected against freezing long.
Gently wipe the surface without applying too
into place by a suitable care product.
much pressure. f If possible, wash the wheels with a sponge or
The Porsche inside window cleaner is also In order to prevent damage to the anti-fric- wash brush about every two weeks. In areas
suitable for cleaning plastic surfaces. tion coating, the inner door seals must not be where road salt or grit is spread on winter
Follow the cleaning instructions on the treated with care products. roads or there is a lot of airborne industrial
container. dust, it is best to clean the wheels weekly.
Never use other chemical cleaners or The Porsche Light Alloy Wheel Cleaner
solvents. (ph-value 9.5) can be used for this pur-
pose.
f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
If the ph-value of the detergent is in-
corect, the protective coating on the
wheels will be destroyed.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
262 Maintenance, Car Care
Leather care Leather care and treatment Carpets and mats
f Clean all types of leather regularly to remove
f Use only a vacuum cleaner or a medium stiff
Characteristics and special features
The natural surface markings of leather, e.g.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
fine dust using a soft, damp, white woollen
cloth or a commercially available microfibre
brush.
creases, healed scars, insect sting marks, struc- cloth. f Remove stains and spots with Porsche stain
tural differences and slight variations in shade and remover.
f Remove heavy contamination with Porsche
grain add to the attractiveness of the natural leath-
leather cleaner. The Porsche range of accessories includes floor-
er product.
Please always follow the instructions for use mats to protect the carpets in summer and winter.
A special mention must be made here of natural given on the containers.
leather. For natural leather, carefully selected Warning!
Caustic cleaners and hard cleaning objects
hides of the highest quality are used. It is not
must not be used. Risk of an accident.
covered completely with dye on production. “Na-
ture’s signature” is therefore easily recogniz- Perforated leather must under no circum- f Always check the movement of the pedals be-
able.This fine material is distinguished by an out- stances get wet on its reverse side. fore driving and make sure that they are not ob-
standing seating comfort, special suppleness and structed by a floor mat or any other object.
Once cleaned, leather (particularly the heavily
a typical patina.
stressed leather seats) must be treated only with f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
Porsche leather care liquid. into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle - do not lie them
loosely in the vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
floor mats of correct size including a securing
possibility.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 263
Airbags Alcantara Safety belts
f Do not use a leather care product to clean Al- f Use a mild detergent to clean soiled belts.
Danger!
There is a danger of serious personal injury
WWW.MANUALS.WS
cantara.
f When drying, avoid direct sunlight.
For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
or death if the airbag system is impaired by f Only use suitable cleaning agents.
improper cleaning work. with a soft brush.
f Do not tint or bleach the belts.
f Do not make any modifications whatsoever on Cleaning when lightly soiled The belt fabric could be weakened, thus affect-
individual components such as the padded
covers of the steering wheel, the front seats, f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap ing safety.
the roof pillars and the rooflinings. solution and wipe off the dirt.
f Let your authorized Porsche dealer clean Cleaning when heavily soiled
these components.
f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
Fabric linings outside in.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
264 Maintenance, Car Care
Storing your Porsche Climate control Vehicle interior
The air conditioning system should be in good The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
period, please consult your authorized PorscheWWW.MANUALS.WS
If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance, Car Care 265
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
266 Maintenance, Car Care
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
WWW.MANUALS.WS Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your Vehicle.............................. 268
Notes on Minor Repairs .............................. 269
Tires/Wheels ............................................. 269
Jack.......................................................... 283
Tool Kit ..................................................... 283
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform
or Garage lift ............................................. 284
Compressor .............................................. 285
Wheel Bolts ............................................... 285
Changing Wheels........................................ 286
Flat Tire..................................................... 287
Electrical System ....................................... 302
Battery ...................................................... 312
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ...... 323
Replacing the remote control battery ........... 326
Bulb Chart ................................................. 327
Replacing Bulbs ......................................... 328
Headlights ................................................. 329
Tail Light ................................................... 335
License Plate Lights ................................... 337
Headlight Adjustment.................................. 338
Changing Headlights from Left to
Right-Hand Traffic....................................... 339
Towing ...................................................... 340
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 267
Exercise Extreme Caution when f In particular, be very careful to ensure that f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), jew- the battery or fuel.
Working on your Vehicle
Danger!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
elry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
belts or other moving parts.
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
Ignoring the following instructions may The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
about any servicing, have it done by your au-
cause serious personal injury or death. of the car.
thorized Porsche dealer.
The fans can start or continue running as a
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle function of temperature, even with the engine
Improper maintenance during the warranty pe-
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not riod may affect your Porsche warranty cover-
switched off.
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do age.
Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
not attempt the adjustments described on the gine off and exercise extreme caution. f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
following pages. coolant, are hazardous to your health. Keep
This caution applies to the entire vehicle. f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig-
these fluids out of children's reach and dispose
nition system. When the ignition is on, high volt-
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well age is present in all wires connected with the
of them in accordance with the appropriate
ventilated area. regulations.
ignition system; therefore, exercise extreme
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the caution when working on any part of the engine f Some countries require additional tools and
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel while the ignition is on or the engine is running. special spare parts to be carried.
Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
fumes might be present. Be especially cau- f Always support your car with safety stands if it
tious of such devices such as hot water heat- is necessary to work under the car. The jack
ers which ignite a flame intermittently. supplied with the car is not adequate for this
f Before working on any part in the engine com- purpose.
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool f When working under the car without safety
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment stands but with the wheels on the ground,
components can burn skin on contact. make sure the car is on level ground, the
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all wheels are blocked, and that the engine can-
times while the engine is running. not be started.
If work has to be performed with the engine Remove the ignition key.
running, always set the parking brake, and
make sure the selector lever is in position “P“
or “N“.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
268 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Notes on Minor Repairs Tires/Wheels Danger!
Risk of loss of control and serious personal
Tool kit WWW.MANUALS.WS
The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
injury or death.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. f If while driving, your vehicle experiences a sud-
The tool kit is accommodated in the spare-wheel
den vibration or ride disturbance, and/or you
well under the cover of the loadspace floor. For your safety remember the following: suspect that possible damage to your tires or
– Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit vehicle has occurred, you should immediately
your Porsche. reduce your speed without excessive use of
the brakes.
– If you intend to use other than original equip-
ment wheels, be sure that they conform to f Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and in-
Porsche specifications for your model.Only spect the tires.
tires with the same make and with the same If you cannot determine the cause for the dis-
specification code (e.g. “N0“, “N1“...) can be turbance, have your vehicle towed to the near-
mounted. est Porsche or tire dealer to have your vehicle
or tire(s) inspected.
– The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
not meet specifications of the original factory f Continuing to operate the vehicle without cor-
installed equipment will affect the safe opera- rection could result in a loss of control and se-
tion of your vehicle. rious personal injury.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 269
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and max-
imum section width.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested un-
der controlled conditions on a specific govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on
the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the ac-
tual conditions of their use, however, and may de-
part significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Example
WWW.MANUALS.WS
270 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Traction AA, A, B, C Temperature A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded.Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 271
Tire pressures The tire pressure must match the prescribed Overloading
value.
Danger!
Risk of accident.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
You can find information on the tire pressure: Danger!
Risk of personal injury, loss of control and
– In the front left door aperture.
Risk of serious personal injury or death. damage to vehicle parts.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure – Please observe the chapter “TIRE
PRESSURES, COLD” on Page 350. f Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
increases risk of a tire failure and resulting
the roof load.
loss of control. Furthermore, low tire pres- These values are for cold tires (68°F/20 °C).
sure increases rate of wear of the affected f If loading the vehicle also correct the tire pres-
tires and cause damage. Always use an f Check the tire pressure at least every sure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can be
accurate tire pressure gauge when checking 2 weeks. Always check when tires are cold. found on the tire pressure plate and in the
inflation pressures. f On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring chapter technical data.
f Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure system: f Never exceed the specified axle load.
listed on the tire sidewall. (Also refer to “Tech- Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE” Overloading can shorten the service life of the
nical data“). on Page 85. tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous vehi-
cle reactions and long braking distances.
f Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
increased. Damage due to overloading is not covered by
must be cold, ambient temperature maximum
the vehicle warranty.
68°F (20°C), when adjusting the inflation pres- f Never let air out of hot tires. This could cause
sure. Avoid sunlight striking the tires before the tire pressure to fall below the prescribed f Please observe the chapter “LOADING INFOR-
measuring cold pressures, since the pressures value. MATION” on Page 191.
would rise from temperature influence.
Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU-
f Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt, overheat and thus be damaged – even invisibly. RES, COLD” on Page 350.
and thus from leakage. Always screw caps Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse-
tightly down. Replace missing caps immedi- quently correcting the tire pressure.
ately.
f For safety reasons, don't use tire inflating bot-
tles.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
272 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
B Vehicle load limit
Is the maximum total weight limit specified of
WWW.MANUALS.WS
the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehi-
cle. This is the maximum weight of passengers
and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle.
If a trailer is being towed, the trailer tongue
weight must be included as part of the cargo
load. Please observe the chapter “LOADING
INFORMATION” on Page 191.
C Original tire size
Size of tires mounted at the factory.
D Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
These values are for cold tires (68°F/20 °C).
E Approved tire sizes
F Size and tire pressure for the collapsible spare
wheel
Example of a tire pressure plate A Example of a tire pressure plate B
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 273
Tire traction Tire wear Danger!
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of con-
Warning!
When driving on wet or slushy roads, a
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into
the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
trol of the vehicle and could cause serious
personal injuries or death.
wedge of water may build up between the approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the f Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing
tires and the road. This phenomenon is tire tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in (1.6 mm). cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden de-
known as “hydroplane“ and may cause par- flation and loss of control which could cause
tial or complete loss of traction, vehicle con- When the indicators appear in two or more adja-
severe personal injury.
trol or stopping ability. cent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. We
recommend, however, that you do not let the tires f Specialized high performance tires on high
f Reduce speed on wet surfaces to prevent this. wear down to this extent. performance sport utility vehicles exhibit more
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly wear than those on a family sedan, or even a
and are even less effective on wet roads. high performance sedan.
Tire life
Therefore, it is important to check your tire
In the United States, state laws may govern the
Tire life depends on various factors, i.e., road sur- pressure and condition at least every two
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such
faces, traffic and weather conditions, driving hab- weeks.
laws.
its, type of tires and tire care.
f If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly,
f Inspect your tires for wear and damage before consult your Porsche dealer.
driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial
wear, wheels might need alignment or tires Uneven wear may not always be due to improper
should be balanced or replaced. wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If
the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted reg-
ularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
274 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Tire care Tire damage, puncture In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain whe-
ther there is a break in the ply with all its conse-
f Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims. f Please observe the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
CLEANING UNITS” on Page 257.
quences or tire damage caused by thermal or me-
chanical overloading due to loss of pressure or
any other prior damage, we recommend that the
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
Danger! tire be replaced for safety reasons.
f Check tires for uneven wear and damage be-
Risk of accident due to hidden tire damage. If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
fore driving off.
Tires may burst, especially at high speeds the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
f Remove imbedded material. causing loss of control of the vehicle, which exceed 30%. Handling inconsistencies may result.
f Replace worn or damaged tires immediately. may result in severe personal injury or death.
f Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
f Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires. f Check tires – including sidewalls – regularly for
foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges.
f Replace missing valve stem caps.
f After driving off road, examine tires for signs
f Keep tires inflated correctly. of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or for-
f Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also eign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a dam-
clean inner side of wheels. aged tire if necessary.
f Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing f Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
the wheels. possible.
Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
f Check wheel rims for corrosion.
f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly
f Remove road salt, if driving in winter. the inner side) checked by an authorized Por-
sche dealer.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 275
Tire replacements Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle
at the time. Only tires of the same make and type
f Use only tire makes and types tested by
Porsche. WWW.MANUALS.WS
must be used. Mixed tires are not permissible.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction.
Only tires with the same manufacturer and You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
with the same specification code (e.g. “N0“, during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).
“N1“...) should be mounted on the vehicle.
If new tires are installed only on one axle, a notice-
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle able change in handling occurs due to the different
at the time. Only tires of the same make and type tread depth of the other tires. This happens espe-
must be used. Mixed tires are not permissible and cially if only rear tires are replaced. However, this
will affect vehicle performance, safety, and can condition disappears as the new tires are broken
affect vehicle warranty. in.
Porsche dealers can recommend the most current f Please adjust your driving style accordingly.
replacement tire options for your vehicle.
Installation of new tires should only be done by a
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction. qualified tire technician.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km). Valves
f Use only plastic valve caps.
f The rubber valves must be replaced whenever
the tires are changed.
f The fitting and replacement specifications
must be observed for metal valves.
f Only use Original Porsche metal valves.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
276 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Parking at the curb Wheel alignment, wheel balancing Danger!
If, during a journey, uneven running or vibra-
Warning!
Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic is-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and
snow tires before winter. Unbalanced wheels may
tions occur that could be caused by damage
to tires or the car, the speed must be re-
lands) are dangerous and may cause hidden duced immediately, but without braking
affect car handling and tire life.
tire damage which is not noticeable until lat- sharply. If you continue your trip without hav-
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel
er. Such damage can result in accidents at ing the cause of the fault remedied, you
balancing.
high speeds causing severe personal injury. might lose control of your vehicle which
Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact
Depending on the force of impact, the edge could cause severe personal injury.
with cleaning agents, since they could drop off.
of the rim can also be damaged. Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In f Stop the vehicle and check the tires.
f If you are in doubt, have the wheel checked by this event, the vehicle should be checked at an au-
f If no cause for the fault can be found, drive
an expert, particularly if you suspect damage thorized Porsche dealer.
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche
on the inside. dealer.
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
Exercise care when parking along curbs.
Maintenance note
Tire repairs are not permissible under any circum-
stances.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 277
Removing and storing tires Note
Under no circumstances should tires older than
f After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque
wheel bolts diagonally.
Please observe the chapter “CHANGING
WWW.MANUALS.WS
6 years be used on your Porsche.
The age of the tire can be obtained from the “DOT“
WHEELS” on Page 286. code number. If, for example, the last three num-
bers read 1202, then the tire was produced in the
Tires must always remain on the same side of
12th week of 2002.
the vehicle.
When wheels are removed, the direction of rota- f Store tires in a cool and dry place.
tion and position of each wheel should be marked.
f Rotate periodically to avoid flat spots.
Example
FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with
their marking.
The perception that tire durability and perfor-
mance are not affected by storage and age is un-
founded.
Chemical additives, which make the rubber elas-
tic, lose their effectiveness over the course of
time and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
Therefore, the tires, especially the spare tire,
should be inspected from time to time.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
278 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Snow tires Danger! Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. Risk of accident and serious personal injury
recommended. WWW.MANUALS.WS
The installation of Porsche approved winter tires is
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure
increases increases risk of a tire failure and
or death due to excessive speed.
f Always check the maximum speed rating on
Use Porsche approved winter tires for grip on resulting loss of control. Furthermore, low
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
snow and ice. For optimum performance, stud- tire pressure increases rate of wear of the
ding can be considered. affected tires and cause damage. f Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for the tires.
Tires with badly worn treads and studs are
possible restrictions.
very dangerous and could cause accidents
resulting in serious personal injuries or Wheel change
Danger!
death. f When wheels are removed, mark the direction
Risk of loss of control and damage to the
f Make sure they are replaced immediately. of rotation and position of each wheel.
vehicle as well as serious personal injury or Example: FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
death.
f Do not exceed the winter tire speed rating. f Always fit the wheels in accordance with the
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture
are optimized for wet and dry driving condi- Snow tires do not have the same degree of trac- markings.
tions, and may not prove favorable for snow tion on dry, wet or snowfree roads as normal tires.
conditions. Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under these
conditions.
f Install winter tires before driving in such condi-
tions. Winter tires do not fulfill their purpose if the tread
depth is less than 5/32 in. (4 mm).
Before mounting winter tires, consult with your
Porsche dealer. He has the technical information Comply with all state and local laws govern-
necessary to advise you on wheel and tire compat- ing snow tire and tread depth requirements.
ibility.
Snow tires should have the same load capacity as
original equipment tires and should be mounted on
all four wheels.
Winter tires with studs should be run at moderate
speeds when new in order to give the studs time
to settle.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 279
Snow chains Different states and countries have varying statu-
tory requirements regarding maximum speed.
Caution!
Risk of damage to body, axle or brake com-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Check with local authorities for possible re-
strictions.
ponents. f Remove chains as soon as the roads are free
f Use only the fine-link snow chains recommend- of ice and snow.
ed and authorized by Porsche so that sufficient
clearance between the wheel well and the
chain is assured.
f Follow instructions issued by the supplier of
the chains.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
280 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
– third three-digit code means tire type code.
– fourth four-digit code means Date of manufac-
WWW.MANUALS.WS ture.
If, for example, the last four numbers read
1204, the tire was produced in the 12th week
of 2004.
C Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls
and their material composition.
D Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure
to which a tire can be inflated.
f Do not exceed the permissible inflation pres-
sure.
E Maximum Load rating
Example of Inscription – 109 - Load capacity coefficient
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can
– Y - Speed code letter be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always
Inscription on radial tire
B TIN (Tire Identification Number) use a tire that has the same maximum load rating
A Tire size as the factory installed tire.
Example: DOT xx xx xxx xxxx
Example: P 255/55R18 109 Y F Term of tubeless or tube tire
– DOT
– P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle. The DOT symbol indicates that the tires com- Identification for tubeless tires.
There is not on every tire this information. ply with the requirements of the US Depart- G Radial
ment of Transportation and provides informa-
– 255 - Indication of tire width in mm The identification indicates if the tire has radial
tion about:
– 55 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio structure.
– first two-digit code means manufacture’s iden-
in percent
tification mark.
– R - Belt type code letter for radial
– second two-digit code means tire size.
– 18 - Indication of rim diameter in inches WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 281
Speed code letter Inscription on light alloy wheels
The speed code letter indicates the maximum per-
missible speed for the tire.
This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Maintenance note
f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
T = up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
H = up to 131 mph (210 km/h) of air.
V = up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W = up to 167 mph (270 km/h) Note on operation
Y = up to 186 mph (300 km/h) f The rim width in inches G and the rim offset L
are visible from the outside. This information
Tip on driving can be found near the tire valve.
Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower
than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on
the tire sidewall.
Please note that in addition to the winter tires, all-
season and all-terrain tires are also subject to G- Rim width in inches
H- Rim-flange contour code letter
speed limits and bear this identification.
I - Symbol for drop-center rim
f Please observe the chapter “SPEED LIMITS J- Rim diameter in inches
K- Double hump
FOR TIRES” on Page 89.
L- Rim offset in mm
WWW.MANUALS.WS
282 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Warning!
The jack must be used only to raise the car
WWW.MANUALS.WS
for wheel changing.
The jack must never be used as a support to
work underneath the vehicle. If the jack is ac-
cidentally dislodged, you or bystanders could
suffer severe personal injury.
f Never jack up other vehicle or other loads with
the jack.
f Always place the car on stable supports if you
have to work under the car.
When working under the vehicle, always use
safety stands specifically designed for this pur-
pose.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 283
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting
Platform or Garage lift
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f The car must be raised only at the illustrated
jacking points.
Please observe the chapter “LIFTING THE VE-
HICLE WITH A JACK” on Page 290.
Please observe the chapter “RAISING VEHICLE
WITH THE JACK” on Page 230.
f Lifting at any other place may damage the ve-
hicle or may result in personal injury.
Caution!
Risk of serious damage to the engine or the
vehicle.
f Never lift the vehicle by the engine, transmis-
sion or axles. A - Front jacking points platform lift C - Rear jacking points platform lift
B - Front jacking point garage lift D - Rear jacking point garage lift
f Do not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.
Platform lift Garage lift
f Before the car is driven on to a lifting platform, A garage lift must be used only at the illustrated
it must be ensured that there is enough space jacking points.
between the lifting platform and the vehicle.
f Lifting at any other place may damage the ve-
hicle or may result in personal injury.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
284 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Compressor Tightening torque
Tightening torque of the wheel bolts 118 ftlb.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
On vehicles without level-control systems, there is
an additional compressor with pressure tester un-
(160 Nm).
der the loadspace floor.
Security wheel bolts
On vehicles with level control, you can use the
compressor of the level-control system to fill the The adapter (wrench socket) for the security
tires. wheel bolts is located in the tool box.
The filler hose required for this purpose can be
found under the left rear seat. To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-theft
protection, the adapter must be used between the
f Please observe the chapter “FOLDING REAR wheel bolt and the wheel bolt wrench.
SEATS FORWARD” on Page 37.
f When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
f Please observe the chapter “INFLATING TIRES that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
ON VEHICLES WITHOUT AIR SUSPENSION” on bolt.
Page 295.
Note on operation
Wheel Bolts If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop,
please do not forget to hand over the socket for
f Always clean the wheel bolts before installing. the security wheel bolts along with the car key.
Maintenance note
f Wheel bolts must not be greased.
f Replace damaged wheel bolts.
Only use the original Porsche wheel bolts spe-
cially designed for this vehicle type.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 285
Changing Wheels While operating the jack Sequence of operation
f The jack is only to be used for changing a
Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions may result
WWW.MANUALS.WS
wheel. Do not use it as a support to work under
the car.
Warning!
The jack must be used only to raise the car
in serious personal injuries to you or to by- f The car must be jacked up only at the illustrat- for wheel changing.The jack must never be
standers. ed jacking points.Lifting at any other place used as a support to work underneath the ve-
may damage the vehicle or may result in per- hicle. If the jack is accidentally dislodged,
Before changing the wheel sonal injury. Never jack the car up by the body you or bystanders could suffer severe per-
sonal injury.
f If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off or the bumpers.
the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and f For safety reasons do not use tire inflating bot- f Never jack up other vehicles or other loads
use other warning devices to alert other motor- tles. Do not use commercially available sealant with the jack.
f Always place the car on stable supports if you
ists. bottles. Use only the tire inflating bottle locat-
f Do not park your vehicle where it may contact ed in the luggage compartment. have to work under it. When working under the
dry grass, brush or other flammable materials. vehicle, always use safety stands specifically
The hot parts of the exhaust system could set designed for this purpose.
such materials on fire, thereby causing both
property damage and severe or fatal physical f Please use a suitable knee rest to protect your
injury. clothing against soiling.
f Passengers must not be in the vehicle when it
is jacked up.
f Before you change a wheel, be sure the ground
is level and firm. If necessary, use a board un-
der the jack to ensure that the jack does not
sink into the ground.
f Set the parking brake and block the wheels op-
posite the flat tire on the other side of the vehi-
cle.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
286 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Flat Tire
WWW.MANUALS.WS
1. Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving
lane as possible.
The car must be parked on a firm and flat
surface offering adequate grip.
2. Switch on the emergency flashers.
3. Fully apply the parking brake.
4. Move the selector lever to position P.
5. Straighten the front wheels.
6. Withdraw the ignition key to lock the steering
and prevent the engine from being started.
7. Have any passengers leave the vehicle.
8. Set up a warning triangle at a suitable
distance.
A - Folding wedges 3. Place one wedge directly in front of and anoth-
er directly behind the diagonally opposite
Securing the vehicle against rolling wheel.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 287
The tire sealant comprises: Warning!
– A filler bottle The sealant is highly flammable and harmful
WWW.MANUALS.WS
– A filler hose
to health.
f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
– A valve turner and
when handling tire sealant.
– A spare valve insert.
f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Danger! f Keep tire sealant away from children.
Risk of accident. f Do not inhale vapours.
f Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or
punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm). In case of contact with the sealant:
f Never use the tire sealant if the rim is dam- f If sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
aged. thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
off without delay.
f Change soiled clothing immediately.
A - Filler bottle f Visit a doctor immediately in the event of an al-
B - Filler hose
lergic reaction.
f Set the car to jacking mode before raising the Jacking point base
car.
Please observe the chapter “RAISING VEHICLE f Set up jack only at the points provided A or B.
WITH THE JACK” on Page 230.
Risk of injury and damage if the vehicle is not
secured.
f Secure the vehicle against rolling.
f Please observe the chapter “SECURING THE
VEHICLE AGAINST ROLLING” on Page 287.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
290 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 291
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Jacking points for vehicles with side member 2. Set up jack only at the points provided F or H.
panels
3. Insert the cover cap E or G completely with
The jacking points are accessible after removing both centering lugs in the slots of the side
the plastic caps from the side member panels. member panel and fold back until it can be felt
to engage.
1. Open cover cap E or G to the front in the side
member panel via the internal handle recess
and pull off (arrow).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
292 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
5. Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand. Re-
move assembly aid and screw in remaining
Maintenance note
Wheel change Screwing in assembly aid
f Immediately after changing a wheel, use
1. Remove the top wheel bolt with the wheel bolt 2. Remove assembly aid from the tool kit and a torque wrench to check the prescribed
wrench from the tool kit. screw in instead of the wheel bolt. tightening torque of the wheel bolts
(118 ftlb./160 Nm).
3. Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
Please observe the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS”
on Page 285.
4. Change wheel.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 293
4. Inflate the tire. f Only fit one collapsible spare wheel on the ve-
Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU- hicle at a time.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
RES, COLD” on Page 350.
f On vehicles with air suspension, use the tire fill-
ing connection A only to inflate the collapsible
Warning! spare wheel.
Risk of accident. f To avoid damage, do not use automatic car
f The collapsible spare wheel must be used only washes when the spare wheel is installed.
over short distances in cases of emergency.
For safety reasons, replace the tires before After using the collapsible spare wheel
the wear indicators appear (webs in the tire
grooves, 1.6 mm high). f Release air by unscrewing the valve insert.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
294 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Checking tire pressure with a pressure
gauge
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire. WWW.MANUALS.WS
2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem.
Note on operation
f Do not press too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape.
If the sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard, reposition the pressure gauge.
3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and
compare it to the permissble tire pressure.
This information can be found on the tire pres-
sure plate.
Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU-
RES, COLD” on Page 350.
Inflating tires on vehicles without air 3. Remove cover of A the engine-compartment
4. Remove the gauge. suspension cover.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE” f f f
on Page 85. 1. Open front lid of the compressor.
2. Screw filler hose A of the compressor onto the
tire valve.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 295
Warning!
Danger of burning. The compressor filler
WWW.MANUALS.WS
hose can become hot during the inflation
process.
f Wear gloves.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
296 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Inflating tires on vehicles with air 4. Open Velcro fastening strip on the fastening 6. Remove cover A in footwell of the front passen-
suspension strap. ger seat.
1. Pull up the seat cushion at loop A on the rear 5. Take tire filling hose out of the bag. f f f
left seat.
2. Pull seat cushion forward (arrow B).
3. Raise seat cushion vertically.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 297
Warning! Note on operation
Danger of injury and risk of damage if the op- The compressor features a protective function
WWW.MANUALS.WS
erating unit is used improperly. against overheating and switches itself off auto-
matically if necessary. The compressor must cool
f Use this operating unit only to inflate or to
down for a few minutes after automatic deactiva-
bleed air from the tires of this vehicle.
tion.
9.Switch ignition on.
Reducing tire pressure on vehicles with
10.Press hand valve D until the correct tire pres- air suspension
sure is achieved.
Monitor the tire pressure with pressure tester f Open air bleed screw E until the correct tire
C during the inflation process. pressure is achieved.
11.Unscrew the screw coupling from the com- Monitor the tire pressure with pressure tester
pressor connection. C while correcting the tire pressure.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
298 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Spare wheel Removing spare wheel
Warning!
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Risk of accident. The wheel and tire size and
Warning!
Danger of injury if the spare wheel is re-
the tire quality of the spare wheel and normal moved improperly.
wheel may differ.
f Remove the spare wheel only when the spare
If a spare wheel that differs from the normal
wheel bracket is locked.
tires is used, this may impair the driving be-
havior. f Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel
bracket with care. The wheel is very heavy (ap-
f The spare wheel must be used only over short
prox. 77 lbs. or 35 kg).
distances in cases of emergency.
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
1. Unscrew all five wheel bolts.
the wear indicators appear (webs in the tire
grooves, 1.6 mm high). 2. Remove the top wheel bolt.
Remove assembly aid from the tool kit and
f Never deactivate the Porsche Stability
screw in instead of the wheel bolt.
Management (PSM) system.
Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
f If the tire on the spare wheel is older than Fitting spare wheel
4 years, the spare wheel should be used only f Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand. Re-
in the event of a flat. move assembly aid and screw in remaining
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering wheel bolt.
speeds. Initially tighten bolts in diagonally opposite se-
The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph quence so that the wheel is centerd.
(80 km/h) if the mounted spare wheel differs f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU-
from the other three wheels on the car. This RES, COLD” on Page 350.
maximum speed must not be exceeded be-
cause of altered driving characteristics and for f After mounting the wheel, tighten all five wheel
reasons of wear. bolts to 111 ftlb. (150 Nm).
Precondition
The central locking system must be unlocked.
f Press button B and swing the spare wheel B - Button for unlocking the spare wheel bracket C - Additional lock
bracket open.
Notes on operation Operating the additional lock of the spare
– If the opening angle exceeds 30°, the spare wheel bracket if the vehicle is tilted to the
wheel bracket automatically moves to final po- side
sition.
The rear lid can be opened only when the spare 1. Open spare wheel bracket.
wheel bracket is in final position. 2. Slide additional lock C to the left.
– If the opening angle is less than 30°, the The spare wheel bracket is mechanically
spare wheel bracket automatically moves back locked.
to its initial position. The warning light “rear lid” and a message on
However, the spare wheel bracket is not the multi-purpose display of the instrument
completely engaged yet and must be closed panel warn the driver that the spare wheel
by hand. bracket is open.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
300 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Closing spare wheel bracket Warning!
Danger of injury and risk of accident if the
Warning!
WWW.MANUALS.WS spare wheel bracket is operated improperly.
Danger of injury and risk of accident if the f Perform emergency unlocking of the spare
spare wheel bracket is operated improperly. wheel bracket only when the vehicle is on a lev-
f Operate the spare wheel bracket only using el surface.
button B.
1. Remove cover of left towing lug D.
f If the vehicle is tilted to the side, more effort
will be required to swing the spare wheel 2. Pull emergency release cable E in the direction
bracket. of the arrow.
The spare wheel bracket is now unlocked and
f Make sure that no persons or animals are with- can be operated.
in the range of movement of the spare wheel
bracket.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 301
Electrical System
WWW.MANUALS.WS
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Use only accessories authorized by Porsche.
Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire.
Replacing fuses or relays with engine running
or the ignition on could cause electrical
shock.
f Disconnect the battery during all work on the
electrical system.
Relays
Sockets Note on operation
Relays should be checked or changed only by an The sockets and thus the connected electrical ac-
authorized workshop. Electrical accessories can be connected to the
12 V sockets. cessories function even if the ignition is swi tched
off or the ignition key is withdrawn.
Alarm system, central locking If the engine is not running and the accessories
are switched on, the vehicle battery will be
The status of the central locking and alarm system discharged.
is not changed by disconnecting the battery.
When the battery is disconnected, the alarm
system ceases to function.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
302 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Replacing fuses
In order to prevent damage to the electrical
WWW.MANUALS.WS
system due to short circuits and overloads, the in-
dividual circuits are protected by fuses.
One fuse box is in the engine compartment. Two
additional fuse boxes are located in the outer ends
of the dashboard.
1. Switch off the consumer with the defective
fuse. Before replacing a fuse, switch off all
electrical consumers and remove the ignition
key.
2. Open the fuse-box lid.
3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot to
check it using the plastic gripper.
A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip. Cover of engine-compartment fuse box Fuse box in engine compartment
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 303
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
304 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Fuse assignment – fuse box in left side of dashboard
No.
WWW.MANUALS.WS Designation Rating in A
1 Sockets 20
2 Parking heater radio receiver 5
3 Sockets 20
4 Parking heater 15
5 Sockets 20
6 Porsche Entry & Drive 15
7 Diagnosis, rain/light sensor, antenna control 5
8 Windshield wipers 30
9 Washer fluid pump 15
10 Power window, rear left 25
11 Central locking system 15
12 Interior light 20
13
14 Power window, front left 25
15 Tail light, right 15
16 Horn 20
17 Turn signal, side light, left 10
18 Headlight washer system 20
19 Fog lights 15
20
21 Cornering light WWW.MANUALS.WS 15
22
23
Rear differential lock WWW.MANUALS.WS
Rear differential lock, disengageable anti-roll bars
30
10
24 Tire pressure monitoring system 5
25
Porsche Stability Management, passenger airbag deactivation, brake pedal switch, instrument panel, engine control unit,
26 10
airbag control unit, steering column module
27
28
29
30
31
32
33 Steering wheel heating, steering column module 15
34 Passenger compartment monitoring, seat heating 5
35 Low beam, high beam 15
36 Vehicle electrical system control unit 10
37
38 Brake lights 10
39 Relay activation, heated rear window, seat heating 5
40 Instrument panel 5
41 Porsche Entry & Drive 15
42 Panorama roof 30
43 Subwoofer
WWW.MANUALS.WS 30
44
45
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Electrical seat adjustment, left; electrical steering column adjustment
Electrical seat adjustment, left; seat heating, rear
30
30
46
47 Rear differential lock 10
48 Auxiliary heater clock 5
49 Servotronic, disengageable anti-roll bars 5
50 Heating pipe ventilation 10
51 Diagnosis, parking brake switch 5
52 Rear wiper 30
53 Heated rear window control unit, passenger compartment monitoring, light switch, steering column module 5
54 Headlight beam adjustment 10
55
56 Fan, front air-conditioning system 40
57 Fan, rear air-conditioning system 40
RES 1 Spare fuse 1 5
RES 2 Spare fuse 2 20
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 307
Fuse assignment – fuse box in left side of dashboard
No.
WWW.MANUALS.WS Designation Rating in A
22
23 Air conditioning
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Electrical seat adjustment, front right; seat heating, front right, rear right 30
10
24 Electrical seat adjustment, front right 30
25 Air-conditioning system, rear 5
26
27 Level control, Porsche Active Suspension Management 15
28
29 Tiptronic conrol unit 10
30 Rear lid power closing mechanism 20
31 Comfort systems, rear 15
32 Central locking, right 10
33
34 Power window, front right 25
35 Turn signal, side light, right 10
36 Roof module, telephone, compass 5
37
38 Porsche Stability Management 10
39
40 Center differential lock 10
41 Towing attachment 10
42 Roof module, garage door opener 5
43
44
Back up light
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Heated washer nozzles, level control
5
5
45
46
WWW.MANUALS.WS
47 Telephone preparation 10
48 Level control, Porsche Active Suspension Management 10
49 Telephone, automatic anti-dazzle mirror 5
50
51 Tiptronic 20
52 Tiptronic 5
53 Windscreen relay 30
54 Windscreen relay 30
55
56 Porsche Stability Management 40
57 Center differential lock, Low Range 40
RES 1 Spare fuse 1 10
RES 2 Spare fuse 2 30
WWW.MANUALS.WS
310 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Fuse assignment – fuse box in engine compartment
No.
WWW.MANUALS.WS Designation Rating in A
1 Fan 60
2 Fan 30
3 Secondary air pump 40
4 Secondary air pump 40
5
6
7 Fuel injectors, ignition coils 20
8 Fuel injectors, ignition coils 20
9 Engine control units 30
10 Engine components: radiator fans, afterrun pump, carbon canister valve, AC pressure sensor, tank leakage diagnosis 10
11 Engine components 15
12 E-box relay, secondary air pumps, afterrun pump relay 5
13 Fuel pump 15
14 Fuel pump 15
15 Engine control unit, fuel pump 10
16 Vacuum pump 30
17 Oxygen sensors 15
18 Oxygen sensors 7,5
Note
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Use the plastic grippers from the fuse boxes in the dashboard to replace the fuses.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 313
Replacing the battery Battery charging Slow battery charging
1. Pay attention to all warnings and follow instruc-
wear; it depends greatly on care, climatic condi-
tions, and driving conditions (distances, loads).
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The service life of the battery is subject to normal Automotive batteries loose their efficiency when
not in use. The charge available in your battery can
be measured with a battery hydrometer. We rec-
tions that come with your battery charger.
2. When charging, ensure adequate ventilation.
ommend that the battery voltage be tested by
f Only use an original Porsche battery, with the 3. Remove battery.
your Porsche dealer who has the appropriate
correct part number, as a replacement. Only Please observe the chapter “REMOVING AND
equipment.
this battery meets the specific requirements of INSTALLING BATTERY” on Page 315.
the vehicle. If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the
4. All vent caps should be open.The fluid level
battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks.
f Please observe the disposal instructions for should meet the indicator mark in each cell.
A discharged battery allows rapid formation of sul-
batteries.
fates, leading to premature deterioration of the 5. Ensure that charger is switched off – danger of
plates. short circuit!
6. Connect charger cables.Charger cables must
Danger! be connected POSITIVE (+) to POSITIVE (+)
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery and NEGATIVE (–) to NEGATIVE (–).
could cause an explosion, resulting in severe 7. Switch on charger. Normally, a battery should
personal injuries. be charged at no more than 10 percent of its
f Charge battery in a well ventilated area. rated capacity. Rated capacity of the battery in
your vehicle is listed on the battery housing.
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a fro- 8. After charging, turn off charger and disconnect
zen battery to thaw out first. charger cables.
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your 9. Tighten the vent caps and reinstall battery.
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with Please observe the chapter “REMOVING AND
cold water for several minutes and call a doc- INSTALLING BATTERY” on Page 315.
tor.
Note
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
WWW.MANUALS.WS
advise you about a suitable charger.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 315
WWW.MANUALS.WS
4. Fold sections of floor carpet forward. 5. Tilt the seat all the way back. 6. Open the 4 clamps C of the battery-box lid with
Unscrew both screws B of the seat mounting. With the seat tilted back, use the fore-and-aft a screwdriver.
adjustment to move the seat forward again.
7. Remove the battery-box cover with ventilation
duct.
Danger!
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of
short circuit and damage to the alternator
and electronic control units.
f Disconnect the negative cable first, and then
the positive cable.
10.Pull off vent hose D on the battery. 12.Unscrew screw F of the bracket. Installing the battery
Remove bracket.
11.Unscrew screw E of the battery fastening 1. Danger of caustic burns!
plate. Place battery in the battery box without tipping
Remove battery fastening plate. Danger! it if possible.
Danger of caustic burns, explosion and risk 2. Push battery forwards and toward the center
of injury. Contact with battery acid will burn of the vehicle until it is under the stops G.
your eyes and skin.
f f f
f Lift battery out of the battery box using the
folding handles.
Try not to tip the battery.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 317
WWW.MANUALS.WS
f Always tighten all screws to the Danger! 10.With the seat tilted back, use the fore-and-aft
prescribed torque. adjustment to move the seat back.
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of
Tilt the seat forward.
3. Fasten the battery fastening plate with screw short circuit and damage to the alternator
E. Tightening torque 15 ftlb. (20 Nm). and electronic control units. 11.Clean threaded holes on the seat mounting.
4. Fasten the bracket with screw F. Tightening f Connect the positive cable first, and then the 12.Use only new bolts B (the bolts are micro-en-
torque 6.5 ftlb. (9 Nm). negative cable. capsulated).
Insert bolts B and screw them in a few turns by
5. Important: Do not forget to connect vent
6. Connect the positive cable. hand.
hose D to the battery.
Tighten bolts.
Make sure that both ends of the vent hose are 7. Connect the negative cable.
Tightening torque 37 ftlb. (50 Nm).
properly connected.
8. Put on the battery-box cover carefully.
13.Clip in front seat trim.
Ensure that the ventilation duct is properly in-
serted. 14.Move seat to normal position.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
9. Engage the 4 clamps C on the battery-box lid
and close them with a screwdriver.
Note
The general information contained in the chapter Removing the collapsible spare wheel
on the battery applies to the battery under the driv-
1. Take out rotary knob A and put it on bolt B.
er’s seat and the battery in the luggage compart-
ment. 2. Unscrew the bolt and take out the collapsible
spare wheel.
f Please observe the chapter “CHARGE STATE”
on Page 312.
Installing the collapsible spare wheel
1. Insert collapsible spare wheel.
2. Screw in bolt B.
3. Place rotary knob A on bolt B and tighten it.
f f f
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 319
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Removing subwoofer 3. Undo the two fastening nuts D. 6. Remove subwoofer housing.
1. Withdraw the ignition key. 4. Unscrew screw E. Installing subwoofer
Remove the Porsche Entry & Drive control unit
5. Disconnect plug connection F. 1. Insert subwoofer housing.
from the ignition lock in vehicles that contain
this feature. 2. Connect plug connection F.
Please observe the chapter “REMOVING THE
CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK” on 3. Tighten the two fastening nuts D.
Page 58. 4. Tighten screw E.
2. Remove any existing tire sealant C. 5. Place any existing tire sealant C in recess.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
320 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Removing battery 3. Open the 4 clamps of the battery-box cover. 7. Pull off vent hose G on the battery.
1. Withdraw the ignition key. 4. Remove the battery-box cover. 8. Undo fastening nut H of battery fastening
Remove the Porsche Entry & Drive control unit plate.
from the ignition lock in vehicles that contain Danger! 9. Remove battery fastening plate.
this feature.
Please observe the chapter “REMOVING THE Danger of explosion and injury and risk of 10.Lift battery out of the battery box using the
CONTROL UNIT FROM THE IGNITION LOCK” on short circuit and damage to the alternator folding handles.
Page 58. and electronic control units.
2. Undo the 4 fastening nuts of the battery box. f Disconnect the negative cable first, and then
the positive cable.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 321
3. Connect the positive cable.
4. Connect the negative cable.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
5. Tighten battery fastening plate with fastening
nut H.
6. Put on the battery-box cover carefully.
7. Engage the 4 clamps on the battery-box cover
and close them.
8. Tighten the 4 fastening nuts of the battery box.
Danger!
Danger of explosion and injury and risk of
short circuit and damage to the alternator
and electronic control units.
f Connect the positive cable first, and then the
negative cable.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
322 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Emergency Starting with Jumper Danger! Danger of gas explosion.
Cables Risk of damage and serious personal injury f Improper use of booster battery to start a ve-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
If the battery is discharged, e.g. in winter or after
due to short circuit. hicle may cause an explosion, resulting in se-
vere personal injuries.
the car has been parked for a long time, the bat- f Use only jumper cables of adequate diameter
tery of another car can be used for starting with cross-section and fitted with completely insu- f Keep sources of ignition away from the bat-
the help of jumper cables. lated alligator clips. tery, e.g. open flame, burning cigarettes or
sparking due to cable contact or welding work.
Make sure the voltage of both batteries is the f Follow all warnings and instructions of the
same. jumper cable manufacturer. f A discharged battery can freeze even at
The capacity (Ampere hours, Ah) of the booster 14°F/10°C. Before connecting jumper ca-
battery must not be substantially less than that of f When connecting jumper cables, make sure
bles, a frozen battery must be thawed out.
the discharged battery.The discharged battery that they cannot get caught in any moving
must be correctly connected to the vehicle's elec- parts in the engine compartment.
trical system. The jumper cables must be long enough so
that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
f Please observe the chapter “BATTERY” on
Page 312. f The vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive ter-
Note minals are connected.
Do not try to start the car by pushing or towing. f The cable clamps must not be allowed to con-
Damage to the catalytic converters and other tact each other when one end of the jumper ca-
components of the car may result. bles are connected to a battery.
f Carefully ensure that tools or conductive jewel-
ery (rings, chains, watch straps) do not come
into contact with the positive jumper cable or
the positive battery post.
f Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
f Do not lean over the battery.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 323
8. Disconnect the positive jumper cable from the
positive terminal of the donor battery first,
WWW.MANUALS.WS
324 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Charging the battery After charging the battery 6. On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem:
WWW.MANUALS.WS
326 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Bulb Chart
Exterior lights
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Type, rating
Interior lights
Type, rating
Xenon low beam and high beam D1S Interior light, front W5W
Side marker light, rear P21/5W Reading light W5W
Side marker light, front W5W Engine compartment light W5W
Turn signal light, rear P21W Footwell light W3W
Turn signal light, front PY21W Glove compartment light W3W
Brake light P21W Center console W3W
License plate light C5W Luggage compartment light K12V10W
Fog light H11 Curb lights (doors) W3W
Rear fog light P21/4W Warning lights (doors) W3W
Back up light P21W Kerb light (rear lid) W5W
Side indicator light W5W Curb lights (rear lid) W5W
Additional high beam H7
Cornering light H3
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 327
Replacing Bulbs Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to exces-
Warning! WWW.MANUALS.WS
sive temperatures and abrasion.
Danger of short circuit. f Attach no coverings (e.g. films, “stone
f Always switch off the relevant consumer when guards“) in the area of the headlights.
changing bulbs. f Use soapy water only to clean light lenses and
Danger of injury. The headlights are under plastic headlight lenses. In no case may chem-
high voltage when installed. ical cleaners or other volatile cleaning fluids be
used.
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
area of the headlights. f To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.
Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
can damage the light housing.
f Only use the bulbs specified in the bulb chart.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
328 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Headlights
Caution! WWW.MANUALS.WS
Risk of damage to headlights due to abrasion
and excessive temperatures.
f Do not affix any coverings (e.g. “stone guards”
or films) in the area of the headlights.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 329
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Installing Bi-Xenon headlights 3. Check whether the headlights are seated se-
curely.
1. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push 4. Fit cover A and fold it down.
fully into the fender.
2. Push headlight to the rear and simultaneously
turn socket wrench D in the direction of the ar-
row.
The headlight locking device must perceptibly
and audibly engage.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
330 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Location of bulbs in Bi-Xenon headlights Opening the lid of the headlight housing Closing lid of headlight housing
Bi-Xenon headlight 1. Open both clips A. 1. Put housing lid B on and press into place.
F Bulb for turn signal 2. Remove housing lid B. 2. Close clips A.
G Bulb for additional high beam
H Bulb for cornering light
I Bulb for side light
J Xenon gas discharge lamp for low beam and
high beam
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 331
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Changing the gas discharge lamp Changing bulb for cornering light Changing side light bulb in Bi-Xenon
headlight
1. Pull off plug J. 1. Pull plug off the bulb (arrow).
1. Pull out the lamp for low beam and high beam.
2. Unclip securing clip G. 2. Unclip securing clip I.
2. Pull the bulb holder out of lamp bracket.
3. Pull off holder H. 3. Replace defective bulb.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
332 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
WWW.MANUALS.WS
3. Pull bulb out of the holder (arrow). Changing additional high beam light 2. Pull plug J off the bulb.
4. Replace defective bulb. 1. Remove cover G. 3. Unclip securing clip H.
5. Reassemble in reverse order. 4. Pull bulb I out.
5. Replace defective bulb.
Note on operation
f Make sure the bulb is installed in the correct
position.
6. Reassemble in reverse order.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 333
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Changing turn signal bulb 2. Remove bulb from the holder (bayonet lock):
Push bulb into the holder and twist in the
1. Turn bulb holder in the headlight housing anti- direction of the arrow.
clockwise and pull it out.
3. Replace defective bulb.
4. Insert bulb holder into the headlight housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
334 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Tail Light 4. Pull out the light unit to the side in the direc- Installing tail light
tion of the arrow and additionally pull it out in
the area of the ball head C. 1. Push on plug connection D until the plug is felt
Removing tail light to click into place (arrow).
5. On the plug connection D press on the plug re-
Maintenance note lease (arrow) and pull off the plug. 2. Insert ball head of tail light C into clip nut E and
f The ignition key must be withdrawn before the fit the light unit into the body (arrow).
tail light is removed. f f f
1. Open rear lid.
2. Remove the two caps A with a tool such as a
screwdriver.
3. Unscrew the two fastening screws B with the
socket wrench from the tool kit.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 335
WWW.MANUALS.WS
3. Screw in the fastening screws B. Replacing bulbs E- Rear fog light and tail light
F- Reversing light
4. Press in caps A. 1. Undo fastening screws C of the housing cover. G- Turn signal light
H- Brake light
2. Remove housing cover D. I - Tail light
WWW.MANUALS.WS
336 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 337
Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be
carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical
Distance
Visual aim shall be performed at not less than
7.5 m (this value is a rounded down conversion
from the 25-foot distance typical of field aim using
a screen). The 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) distance is mea-
sured from the headlamp lens to the viewing
screen.
Floor
The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
and approximately level.
Screen
Headlight Adjustment Adjustment The screen upon which headlamp beams are pro-
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to jected is perpendicular to the floor and the vehi-
f Check tire pressure and adjust if necessary. cle's longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in color,
drive and the fuel tank completely filled.
f Please observe the chapter “TIRE PRESSU- unobstructed, and wide and high enough to ac-
The driver's seat must be loaded by a person or a
RES, COLD” on Page 350. commodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
165lbs. (75kg) weight and the tire pressures must
aimed.
f Please observe the chapter “REPLACING BUL- meet the prescribed values. After being loaded,
BS” on Page 328. the car must be rolled a few meters so that the The screen should be wide enough to provide at
suspension can settle. least 3.3 ft. (1 m) of space outboard of the vehi-
cle's headlamp spacing.
For checking the headlight adjustment, the verti-
cal position of the cutoff of the lowbeam (see fig.)
has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) in
distance of 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) from the front lens of
the headlamp.The correct position of the cutoff is
3.0 in. (7.5 cm) at 24.6 ft. or 7.5 m (0.4°) below
WWW.MANUALS.WS
a horizontal line, x cm from ground to the center
of the headlamp lens.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 339
Towing
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Certain state statutes and local ordinances prohib-
it towing with a chain, rope or even a tow bar. In
addition, damage to your vehicle may result from
improper procedures. Consult your authorized
Porsche dealer for details.
Vehicle towing
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to
be used on Porsche vehicles. Under certain cir-
cumstances, wheel lifts may be used when the ve-
hicle will not roll.
The vehicle must be towed with all four
wheels off the ground, otherwise damage to
the vehicle may result.
f Never use the towing hook to tow this or any 2. Screw in towing hook B as far as the stop (left-
Towing hook
other vehicle. hand thread) and tighten hand-tight.
The towing hook is contained in the tool kit.
Front and rear mounting
Caution! 1. Carefully lever out the appropriate plastic cov-
Risk of damage to the vehicle. er A in the bumper with the blade of a screw-
driver.
f Use the towing hook only for an emergency to The cover is captive and need not be removed
remove the vehicle off the road. The towing completely.
hook is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto
the flat bed, tractor or towing aparatus if the
vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
hook.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
340 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
4. Carefully feed towing straps through the open-
ing in the front wheels.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Practical Tips, Minor Repairs 341
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
342 Practical Tips, Minor Repairs
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
WWW.MANUALS.WS Vehicle Identification ................................... 344
Engine Data ............................................... 346
Transmission ............................................. 347
Tires, Rims, Tracks .................................... 348
Tire Pressures, Cold................................... 350
Capacities ................................................. 351
Weights ..................................................... 352
Driving Performance................................... 353
Dimensions................................................ 354
Ground Clearance ...................................... 355
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 343
This label contains the following information:
1. Vehicle Identification No.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
2. Type/Type description
3. Engine code/Transmission code
4. Paint No./Interior
5. Optional equipment
A duplicate of this label is in your Maintenance
Booklet.
Note
The data bank cannot be reordered when lost or
damaged.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
344 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 345
Engine Data
Type
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Four-cycle spark-ignition
engine
Number of cylinders 8
Bore 3.66 in. (93 mm)
Stroke 3.27 in. (83 mm)
Displacement 275 cu. in. (4511 cm3)
Compression ratio 9.5 : 1
Net-horsepower, SAE J 1349 450 HP (331 kw)
at engine speed 6000 rpm
Net. torque, SAE J 1349 460 ftlb. (620 NM)
at engine speed 2250 - 4750 rpm
WWW.MANUALS.WS
346 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Transmission
Transmission ratio
WWW.MANUALS.WS
1st gear 4.15 : 1
2nd gear 2.37 : 1
3rd gear 1.56 : 1
4th gear 1.16 : 1
5th gear 0.86 : 1
6th gear 0.69 : 1
Reduction gear 2.70 : 1
Reverse gear 3.39 : 1
Final drive ratio 3.70 : 1
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 347
Tires, Rims, Tracks
Tires
WWW.MANUALS.WS Wheel
front/rear
Rim offset
front/rear
Track
front rear
Summer tires 255/55 R 18 109 Y XL1) 8 J x 18 57 mm 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
275/45 R 19 108 Y XL 9 J x 19 60 mm 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL 9 J x 20 60 mm 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
275/40 R 20 106 Y XL 9 J x 19/10 J x 20 60 mm / 55 mm 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.6 in. (1666 mm)
Winter tires 235/60 R 18 107 H XL1) 8 J x 18 57 mm 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 64.8 in. (1662 mm)
1)
255/55 R18 109 V XL 8 J x 18 57 mm 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
255/50 R19 107 V XL 1) 9 J x 19 60 mm 64.6 in. (1641 mm) 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
All-Season 255/55 R 18 109 V XL1) 8 J x 18 57 mm 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
All-Terrain 235/60 R 18 107 T XL1) 8 J x 18 57 mm 64.8 in. (1647 mm) 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “T”) for permitted top speed are
minimum requirements.
When fitting new tires or changing tires: Please observe the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS” on Page 269.
The authorization of tire and rim sizes is determined on the basis of extensive testing.
Tire and rim sizes Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you about the current authorization status.
Refitting with sizes not authorized by Porsche may have a dangerous effect on driving stability.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
348 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Tires Wheel Rim offset Track
front/rear front/rear front rear
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only with the tire + rim combination marked 1).
The best possible handling characteristics are achieved when snow chains are fitted on all four wheels of the
vehicle. However, it is also possible to fit snow chains on only one axle (preferably the rear axle).
1)
Snow chains For safety reasons, vehicles with snow chains must not be driven faster than 30 mph (50 km/h).
f Observe the respective road traffic regulations.
f Use only Porsche-authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 349
Tire Pressures, Cold
Partially loaded
Tire size
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Front axle Rear axle
235/60 R 18
255/55 R 18
38 psi (2.6 bar) 43 psi (2.9 bar)
275/45 R 19
275/40 R 20
195/75 - 18 collapsible spare wheel 51 psi (3.5 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar)
Fully loaded
Tire size Front axle Rear axle
235/60 R 18
255/55 R 18 38 psi (2.6 bar) 50 psi (3.4 bar)
275/45 R 19
275/40 R 20
195/75 - 18 collapsible spare wheel 51 psi (3.5 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar)
These tire filling pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Please observe the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS” on Page 269.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
350 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Capacities
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Use only fluids and fuels authorized by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you.
Your Porsche has been designed so that it is not necessary to mix any additives with oils or fuels.
Engine oil change quantity without oil filter approx. 8.5 quarts (8.0 liters)
Engine oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 9.0 quarts (8.5 litres)
Reference indication is the level on the oil dipstick.
Please observe the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL” on Page 236.
Coolant 1) approx. 4.8 – 5.5 U.S. gallons (18 - 21 liters)
Automatic transmission with torque converter approx. 10.6 quarts (10.1 liters)
Transfer box approx. 0.9 quarts (0.85 liter)
Front-axle differential approx. 1.1 quarts (1.0 liter)
Rear-axle differential approx. 1.5 quarts (1.4 liters)
Locking rear differential approx. 1.7 quarts (1.6 liters)
approx. 26.4 U.S. gallons (100 liters),
Fuel tank
including approx. 3.1 U.S. gallons (12 liters) reserve
Fuel quality The engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel consumption if unleaded premi-
um fuel with 98 RON/88 MON is used.
If unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON/85 MON are used, the engine's
“Electronic Oktane™ knock control“ automatically adapts the ignition timing.
Power steering approx. 1.6 quarts (1.5 liters) Pentosin CHF 11 S®
Brake fluid approx. 1.0 quart (0.95 liter)
Use only Original Porsche brake fluid.
Window/headlight washer system approx. 7.9 quarts (7.5 liters)
1) Empty weight includes 165 lbs. (75 kg) driver and baggage share.
2)
The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.
Note: If additional equipment is installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.
3)
Use only Original Porsche Roof Transport System.
WWW.MANUALS.WS
352 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Driving Performance
WWW.MANUALS.WS
The specifications refer to a vehicle at DIN empty weight and max. 441 lbs. load or 200 kg, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment (e.g. special tires)
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 353
Dimensions
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Length 188.4 in. (4786 mm)
Length with external spare wheel 197.7 in. (5021 mm)
Width 75.9 in. (1928 mm)
Height at DIN empty weight 66.9 in. (1699 mm)
Height at DIN empty weight (rail) 68.5 in. (1741 mm)
Height at DIN empty weight (basic carrier of Roof Transport System) 70.4 in. (1789 mm)
Height at DIN empty weight
87.4 in. (2219 mm)
with rear lid open
Max. wading depth 22 in. (555 mm)
Track
18" front 64.8 in. (1647 mm)
18" rear 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
19" front 64.6 in. (1641 mm)
19" rear 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
20" front 64.6 in. (1641 mm)
20" rear 65.2 in. (1656 mm)
Wheelbase 112.4 in. (2855 mm)
Overhang, front 36.5 in. (927 mm)
rear 39.5 in. (1004 mm)
Turning circle 468.5 in. (11.9 m)
WWW.MANUALS.WS
354 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Ground Clearance
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Air suspension – normal level
Ramp angle 20.4°
Overhang angle, front 29.1°
Overhang angle, rear 24.8°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 8.5 in. (217 mm)
Air suspension – low level
Ramp angle 17.7°
Overhang angle, front 27.3°
Overhang angle, rear 22.8°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 7.5 in. (190 mm)
Air suspension – loading level
Ramp angle 14.9°
Overhang angle, front 24°
Overhang angle, rear 20.9°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 6.2 in. (157 mm)
Air suspension – terrain level
Ramp angle 22.2°
Overhang angle, front 30.7°
Overhang angle, rear 25.7°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 9.6 in. (243 mm)
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 355
Air suspension – special terrain level
Ramp angle
WWW.MANUALS.WS
24.7°
Overhang angle, front 32.4°
Overhang angle, rear 27.3°
Ground clearance (center of axles) 10.7 in. (273 mm)
WWW.MANUALS.WS
356 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
WWW.MANUALS.WS
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 357
Index
A WWW.MANUALS.WSB Function ...............................................49
ABD ......................................... 211, 213, 215 Battery.........................58, 60, 77, 170, 312
Unit......................................................51
ABS ......................................... 211, 214, 217 Warning light.........................................50 After charging.....................................325
Off road .............................................218 Air-conditioned areas Car key ..............................................326
Warning light ...................................... 217 Rear...................................................136
Care...................................................312
After driving off road ................................... 221 Air-conditioning compressor.......127, 130, 135
Charge state.......................................312
Aftermarket Alarms ..................................... 169 Alarm button.................................................17
Charging ............................................325
Air cleaner.................................................. 245 Alarm system ............................... 21, 23, 27,
Installing.............................................322
Air conditioning ..........................................28, 30, 190, 302
Putting vehicle into operation ...............313
Central vents ............................. 129, 135 Alcantara....................................................264
Removing ..................................320, 321
All-Season tires ...........................................348
Cover flap .......................................... 126 Removing/installing ....................315, 319
All-Terrain tires ............................................348
Disabling control panel (rear) ............... 132 Replacing ...........................................314
All-wheel drive...........................111, 211, 213
Display...................................... 127, 131 Warning light.......................................109
Anti-freeze content ......................................240
Footwell ....................................129, 135 Winter driving......................................313
Anti-lock brake system ..............211, 214, 217
Four zone........................................... 131 Before driving off .................................12, 221
Anti-roll bars
Fresh-air intake ................................... 125 Belts ............................................................42
Disengageable ....................................209
Mono function..................................... 128 Fastening .............................................44
Armrest.............................................172, 174
Rear.......................................... 132, 136 Height adjustment .................................45
Assembly aid .....................................293, 299
REST mode ............................... 130, 136 Opening ...............................................44
Assistance when driving downhill..................219
Sensors .............................................126 Tensioner .............................................43
Audio
Setting air quantity ..................... 128, 134 Warning light.........................................43
Tips ...................................................167
Setting temperature ................... 128, 133 Brake...........................................................63
AUTO button....................127, 128, 131, 133
Side vents ................................. 129, 135 Booster ................................................65
AUTO-LOCK ..................................................23
Two zone ........................................... 127 Discs ...................................................66
Automatic anti-dazzle operation......................57
Vents ................................................. 125 Pads ....................................................66
Automatic brake differential .......211, 213, 215
Windshield ................................. 129, 135 Warning light.........................................64
Automatic circulating-air mode ............129, 134
Air quantity Brake fluid
Automatic mode, air conditioning127, 128, 133
Setting ...................................... 128, 134 Changing............................................243
Automatic transmission fluid ........................245
Air suspension ................. 158, 175, 211, 228 Brake light..................................................336
Airbag................................................. 49, 264
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Disposal ............................................... 50
Brake tests.................................................219
358 Index
Brake wear Child seat .....................................................48 Storing speed .................................... 122
Warning light ........................................ 66 Attachment ...........................................48 Switching off ...................................... 124
Brake-fluid level
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Checking ............................................ 242
Childproof locks
Rear doors ...........................................26
Switching on ...................................... 122
Cupholder......................................... 172, 176
Brakes ................................................ 62, 219 Cigarette lighter..........................................166 Closing rear ....................................... 177
Fluid.......................................... 242, 351 Circulating-air mode ...........................129, 134 Opening front ..................................... 176
Fluid warning light ...................... 110, 243 Circulating-air mode, automatic ...........129, 134 opening rear ...................................... 177
Pads ............................................. 14, 67 Cleaner Removing insert front ......................... 176
Test stand .......................................... 219 Air......................................................245
Warning light ........................................ 63 Particle...............................................245
Wear.................................................. 110 Clock ...........................................................99 D
Bulbs Collapsible spare wheel ...................... 90, 216, Data bank.................................................. 344
Changing............................................ 336 ...............................................294, 319, 349 Diagnostic Socket ........................................ 15
Chart ................................................. 327 Warning light.......................................108 Dimensions................................................ 354
Comfort function Dimming.................................................... 146
Sliding/lifting roof.......................148, 153 Button ............................................... 144
C Comfort lighting ..........................................146 Door lock
Capacities .................................................. 351 Coming Home function .......................104, 146 Deicing .............................................. 258
Car care..................................................... 256 Compass....................................................100 Door locking, automatic....................... 23, 102
Car Telephone ............................................ 169 Compressor ......................................285, 296 Door mirrors.............................. 55, 146, 194
Care ............................... 260, 262, 263, 264 Coolant Automatic anti-dazzle operation ............. 57
Cargo area ................................................. 182 Checking ............................................240 Driving with a trailer............................ 194
Carpet ....................................................... 263 Cooling system .............................................73 Extending ............................................ 56
Catalytic converter...................................... 255 Engine coolant level warning ..................73 Folding in............................................. 56
Center differential lock ................................ 208 Temperature gauge...............................73 Heating................................................ 56
Central locking system ......................... 21, 302 Warning................................................73 Setting ................................................ 56
Button.................................................. 22 Cornering light ............................................115 Swivelling, automatic ............................ 56
Button (rear) ......................................... 31 Crankcase ventilation ..................................255 Door opening................................ 19, 20, 21,
Central vents ..................................... 129, 135 Crossing obstacles .....................................226 ........................................... 23, 24, 26, 102
Changing wheels................................286, 293 Cruise control Emergency operation ........................... 18
Check engine ............................................... 76 Accelerating .......................................123 Door trim panel.......................................... 172
Checking hydraulic fluid (power steering) ...... 244 Decelerating .......................................123 Lighting ............................................. 146
Child restraint anchorages............................. 46 Interrupting.........................................123 Doors.......................................................... 26
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Child restraint systems .................................. 47 Speed limit .........................................122 Door-surrounding lighting ............................ 146
Index 359
Drinks holder..................................... 172, 176 Electrical system ........................................302 Engine oil level............................................236
Closing rear........................................ 177 Emergency operation Checking ............................................236
Opening front ..................................... 176
opening rear....................................... 177 WWW.MANUALS.WS
Door lock .............................................23
Doors...................................................18
Warning ..............................................236
Engine residual heat ...........................130, 136
Removing insert front .......................... 176 Ignition key ...........................................18 Entry aid.......................................................35
Driving Sliding/lifting roof................................149 Switching on and off ..............................35
Load .................................................. 193 Emergency starting.....................................323 Exhaust gas
Off road ............................................. 220 Emergency unlocking Monitoring ..............................................5
Sand.................................................. 227 Filler flap ............................................251 Exit aid.........................................................35
Trailer ................................................ 195 Selector lever .....................................205 Switching on and off ..............................35
Winter ................................................ 204 Spare wheel bracket ...........................301
Driving downhill .......................................... 223 Emission control .................................5, 8, 76
Driving light assistant Check engine warning light ....................76 F
Light switch........................................ 114 Emission Control System .............................254 Fabric linings ..............................................264
Driving light assistant, automatic.................. 115 Engine Filler flap ....................................................250
Driving performance ................................... 353 Boost pressure .....................................75 Release ................................................15
Driving program Cooling system .....................................73 Filling pressure..............................................85
Low Range indicator light .................... 207 Data...................................................346 Plate ..................................................345
Off road .................. 201, 203, 206, 207 Idling..................................................199 Reducing ...................................296, 298
Reduced ............................................ 204 Starting and stopping ............................60 Tables ................................................350
Road................................ 200, 202, 207 Engine compartment Warning light...........68, 70, 87, 97, 108
Driving programme Cleaning .............................................260 Warning message..................................93
Off road ............................................. 210 Lid .....................................................180 Fire extinguisher..........................................171
Road.................................................. 210 Engine drag torque control ..........................215 Floor mats..................................................263
Driving systems for off-road driving .............. 221 Engine Oil Fluids and fuels ...........................................351
Driving with a trailer .................. 160, 194, 352 Performance class ..............................239 Fog lights ...................................................114
Drop-center rim .......................................... 282 Viscosity.............................................239 Folding wedges...........................................287
DVD Player................................................. 177 Engine oil ...................................................235 Footbrake.....................................................63
Change ..............................................238 Warning light.........................................64
Level..................................................236 Footwell light ..............................................146
E Recommendation ................................238 Fresh-air intake ...........................................125
Easy Entry function ....................................... 35 Temperature gauge...............................72 Front seat with memory ..........................33, 34
ECON mode ...................................... 130, 135 Front seats ..........................................32, 172
Button....................................... 127, 131 WWW.MANUALS.WS
Topping up .........................................237
Adjusting the seats ................................32
Seat position.........................................32
360 Index
Front windscreen wiper ............................... 120 Closing the housing lid.........................331 Interior lighting........................................... 144
Fuel .................................................... 74, 250 Height adjustment ...............................339 Interior mirror .............................................. 55
Index 361
Lid Locking the steering column Mirrors .......................................................194
Engine compartment ........................... 180 With Porsche Entry & Drive ....................59 Door mirrors.........................................55
Luggage compartment ........................ 178
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Seal ................................................... 262
Without Porsche Entry & Drive................59
Locking, keyless ...........................................24
Interior mirror .......................................55
Moving off ................................198, 200, 201
Lifting Immobilizer...........................................25 MSR...........................................................215
Garage lift .......................................... 284 Switching off readiness for operation......25 Multi-functional steering wheel ........................53
Jack................................................... 290 Unlocking vehicle doors .........................24 Function keys.................................53, 54
Platform ............................................. 284 Locks ..........................................................84 Multi-purpose display ............................78, 181
Light Low beam .........................................114, 146 Basic screens .......................................79
Flasher............................................... 117 Switch................................................114 Clock ...................................................99
Switch................................................ 114 Low level....................................................228 Collapsible spare wheel .........................90
Light alloy wheels ....................................... 262 Low Range ...............84, 201, 203, 207, 210 Comfort..............................................101
Inscription .......................................... 282 Indicator light......................................207 Compass ............................................100
Light segments........................................... 159 Off-road driving program......................206 Factory settings ..................................105
Lighter Luggage Language ...........................................105
front .................................................. 166 Compartment cover ............................172 Level ....................................................83
rear ................................................... 166 Safety net...........................................172 Lighting ..............................................104
Lights ............................................... 194, 262 Luggage compartment ................................182 Load ....................................................91
Changing............................................ 328 Luggage compartment cover.....172, 183, 184 Locks/reduction....................................84
Chart ................................................. 327 Luggage compartment lid...................178, 179 Main menu ............................................80
Limit speed Locking ................................................24 Operation, controls................................78
Off-road shifting ......................... 207, 210 Opening ...............................................24 Settings................................................99
Load.......................................................... 193 Luggage net ......................................182, 193 Spare wheel..........................................90
Compartment cover ............................ 172 Luggage safety net ............................185, 186 System.................................................92
Full ...................................................... 91 Bracket ..............................................185 Tire pressure .................................85, 87
Partial .................................................. 91 Tire sealant/sealing set .........................91
Safety net .......................................... 172 Tire type...............................................88
Securing (ski bag) ............................... 188 M Tyre type ..............................................88
Stowing.............................................. 193 Main menu....................................................80 Units ..................................................104
Load fastening points.................................. 182 Make-up mirror ...........................................142 Vehicle info ...........................................82
Loading level ............................ 229, 230, 355 Manual headlight beam adjustment...............107 Warnings ..............................................83
Loadspace ........................................ 182, 193 Memory ................................................33, 34
Loadspace floor ......................................... 182 Minor paint damage ....................................259
Locking conditions........................................ 22 WWW.MANUALS.WS
Minor repairs ..............................................269
362 Index
N Load ....................................................91 PASM ............................................... 211, 231
Locks/reduction....................................84 Display .............................................. 231
Navigation system ...................................... 170
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Normal level ............................................... 228 Main menu............................................80
Operation, controls ...............................78
Indicator light ..................................... 110
Warning light...................................... 231
Settings ...............................................99 Passenger compartment ............................ 193
O Spare wheel..........................................90 Passenger compartment monitoring
Octane ratings............................................ 252 System.................................................92 system ............................ 21, 23, 27, 28, 30
Odometer .................................................... 75 Tire pressure .................................85, 87 Passenger-seat drawer ...................... 172, 175
Off delay ........................................... 104, 146 Tire sealant/sealing set .........................91 PCM.......................................................... 170
Off-road ABS ..................................... 218, 223 Tire type...............................................88 Person buttons ............................................ 33
Off-road driving ........................................... 220 Tyre type..............................................88 Plastic parts .............................................. 262
Recommendation ................................ 221 Units ..................................................104 Polishing.................................................... 259
Off-road shifting Vehicle info ...........................................82 Porsche Active Suspension
Limit speed ............................... 207, 210 Warnings ..............................................83 Management..................................... 211, 231
Oil ............................................................. 235 Operating in other countries.........................249 Display .............................................. 231
Change .............................................. 239 Oxygen sensor ...........................................255 Indicator light ..................................... 110
Consumption ........................................ 14 Warning light...................................... 231
Dipstick.............................................. 237 Porsche Communication Management ......... 170
Filler opening ...................................... 237
P Porsche Down-Hill Assistant ........................ 219
Performance class .............................. 239 Paint ..........................................................259 Porsche Entry & Drive .................. 24, 25, 178
Temperature gauge .............................. 72 Panic button .................................................17 Immobilizer .......................................... 25
Topping up .........................................237 Panorama roof system ................................151 Opening/locking rear window ................ 24
Viscosity ............................................ 239 ParkAssist ................................157, 159, 195 Opening/locking spare wheel bracket .... 24
Oil level Parking ......................................................204 Porsche Stability
Checking ............................................ 236 Parking aid ..........................................34, 157 Management............................ 211, 214, 294
On-board computer .............................. 78, 181 Parking brake ...............................................62 Deactivating....................................... 216
Basic Screens ...................................... 79 Test stand ..........................................219 Indicator light ..................................... 110
Clock ................................................... 99 Warning light................................63, 110 Information light ................................. 216
Collapsible spare wheel ......................... 90 Parking heater ............................................137 Off road............................................. 215
Comfort .............................................101 Activating the memory.........................140 Switching on ...................................... 216
Factory settings.................................. 105 Faults.................................................141 Warning light............... 68, 70, 110, 216
Language ........................................... 105 Programming.............................138, 139 Porsche Traction Management ........... 211, 212
Switching on and off............................138 Power measurement .................................. 234
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Level.................................................... 83
Lighting.............................................. 104 Parking light ...............................................117
Particle filter...............................................245
Power steering .......................................... 244
Index 363
Power windows .............................. 29, 30, 31 Rear lid .............................................178, 179 Running in Tires ............................................14
Comfort function (windows).................... 30 Locking ................................................24 Running-gear control systems ......................211
One-touch operation .............................. 30
Opening/closing windows ...................... 29 WWW.MANUALS.WS
Opening ...............................................24
Unlocking .............................................20
Running-gear setup......................................231
Indicator light ......................................110
Readiness for operation......................... 29 Rear light ...................................................335 Warning light.......................................231
Storing end position .............................. 31 Rear seats....................................................37
Switching off (rear)................................ 31 Folding forward.....................................37
Power-transmission..................................... 211 Rear window...............................................180 S
Preservation ............................................... 259 Locking ................................................24 Safety belts .........................................42, 264
Pressure tester........................................... 298 Opening ........................................20, 24 Belt tensioner .......................................43
PSM ........................................ 211, 214, 294 Unlocking .............................................20 Fastening..............................................44
Deactivating ....................................... 216 Rear window wiper ......................................121 Height adjustment .................................45
Indicator light...................................... 110 Rear-axle load.............................................191 Opening................................................44
Information light.................................. 216 Reduction.....................................................84 Warning light.........................................43
Off road ............................................. 215 Reflector ....................................................335 Safety catch, engine compartment lid...........181
Switching on....................................... 216 Refuelling ...................................................251 Safety compliance sticker............................345
Warning light ............... 68, 70, 110, 216 Relays ........................................................302 Safety net........................172, 184, 185, 186
PTM.................................................. 211, 212 Release button............................................198 Assembly............................................186
Relocking, automatic.....................................21 Bracket ..............................................185
Remote control .............................................17 Permitted uses....................................185
R Changing the battery ...........................326 Screewdriver ..............................................283
Radiator fans.............................................. 235 Removing spots and stains ..........................259 Sealant..................................90, 91, 96, 288
Radio Reserve .....................................................251 Warning light.......................................108
Tips ................................................... 167 REST button ......................................127, 131 Sealing set .................................................288
Radio remote control .................................... 17 REST mode .......................................130, 136 Seals, care .................................................262
Changing the battery........................... 326 Reverse gear..............................................161 Seat heating ........................................40, 132
Rain sensor ................................................ 119 Reversing light............................................336 For air-conditioned areas at the rear .......41
Rain sensor operation ................................. 120 Rims ..........................................................221 Rear...................................................132
Reading light Diameter ............................................282 Switching off.........................................40
Front.................................................. 144 Rim width ...........................................282 Switching on .........................................40
Rear .................................................. 145 Rocker switches ................................200, 201
Rear differential lock ................................... 208 Roof console .....................................146, 172
Rear fog light .................................... 114, 336 Roof Transport System..............189, 352, 354
WWW.MANUALS.WS
364 Index
Seat memory ......................................33, 161 Ski bag ......................................................187 Stability management system...................... 211
Recall using car key .............................. 33 Sliding roof.................................................147 Starting ..................................................... 198
Recall using person buttons ................... 33
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Storage, automatic ............................... 34
Closing...............................................148
Lifting.................................................148
Starting and stopping ................................... 60
Steam-jet units ........................................... 158
Storing driver’s seat settings ................. 34 Opening completely.............................148 Steering lock ............................................... 58
Storing parking aid................................ 34 Opening to comfort setting ..................148 Steering wheel ............................................. 51
Storing passenger seat settings............. 34 Readiness for operation.......................147 Adjusting ............................................. 52
Seat memory (comfort) ................................. 33 Sliding/lifting roof .......................................147 Heating................................................ 51
Seat with memory....................................... 161 Closing...............................................148 Multi-functional steering wheel ............... 53
Seats Lifting.................................................148 Shifting.............................................. 201
Front.................................................... 32 Opening completely.............................148 Steering wheel buttons ................................. 53
Position................................................ 32 Opening to comfort setting ..................148 Lighting ............................................... 54
Rear..................................................... 37 Readiness for operation.......................147 Stopping ................................................... 203
Setting ................................................. 32 Snow chains ......................................280, 349 Storage.............................................. 16, 172
Security wheel bolts.................................... 285 Snow tires ..................................................279 Storage compartment ................................ 172
Selection mode Socket .......................................................302 At the sides in the
Automatic.................................. 200, 201 Spare parts ................................................344 luggage compartment ........................ 175
Manual ...................................... 202, 203 Spare wheel .............90, 294, 299, 319, 349 Storage tray
Selector lever.............................................198 Warning light.......................................108 Armrest, front .................................... 174
Selector lever lock ...................................... 205 Spare wheel bracket .................178, 300, 301 Armrest, rear ..................................... 174
Selector lever position ................................ 199 Locking ................................................24 Stowing luggage ........................................ 193
Display...................................... 198, 199 Opening ...............................................24 Subwoofer
Service indicator.........................................109 Unlocking .............................................20 Installing ............................................ 320
Shifting Special low level .........................................228 Removing .......................................... 320
Down ................................................. 202 Special terrain level.....................................228 Summer tires............................................. 348
On the steering wheel.......................... 200 Speed code letter .......................................281 Sun blind ................................................... 143
Up ..................................................... 202 Speed limit ..........................................89, 281 Sun visors ................................................. 142
Shifting up.................................................. 203 Speedometer................................................72
Shock absorber adjustment ......................... 211 Cayenne Turbo...............................68, 70
Shock absorbers ........................................ 211 SportDesign package......................................7 T
Side lights .................................................. 114 Stability Management System .............214, 216 Tachometer ................................... 68, 70, 72
Side marker light ........................................ 146 Indicator light......................................110 Tail light............................................ 335, 336
Side member panel..................................... 292 Off road..............................................215 Tank opening ............................................. 250
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Side vents ......................................... 129, 135 Warning light.........................68, 70, 110 Telephone.................................................. 169
Index 365
Temperature Tire sealant ...........................90, 91, 96, 288 Turn signal light...........................................334
Sensor ...................................... 127, 131 Warning light.......................................108 Indicator light .................................68, 70
Setting ...................................... 128, 133
Temporary change-down.............................. 200 WWW.MANUALS.WS
Tires ..........................................................269
Changing............................................170
Rear...................................................336
Switch ................................................117
Terrain level................................................ 228 Damage .............................................275 Turn signal pilot light
Test stands Flat ....................................................287 Indicator light .................................68, 70
Measurement ..................................... 219 Inflating .....................................295, 297 Turn signal/high beam/
Theft protection ............................................ 16 Inscription ..........................................281 headlight flasher stalk..................................117
Through-load bag........................................ 187 Replacing ...........................................276 Tyre pressure
Securing load ..................................... 188 Sidewall..............................................281 Warning message..................................93
Through-load facility .................................... 187 Size ...................................................281
Tie-down Tracks ...............................................348
Belts ......................................... 182, 193 Type ....................................................89 U
Equipment .......................................... 193 Valves ................................................276 Ultrasonic measurement ..............................160
Rings ........................................ 182, 185 Tool kit .......................................................269 Ultrasound sensors, ParkAssist ....................158
Tiptronic ...................................... 15, 51, 198 Screewdriver ......................................283 Ultrasound sources .....................................160
Rocker switches ................. 51, 200, 201 Tools..........................................................269 Undercoating ..............................................261
Tire Screwdriver ........................................283 Unlocking, keyless ........................................24
Care .................................................. 275 Towing ..............................................205, 340 Immobilizer ...........................................25
Life .................................................... 274 Capacity.............................................191 Uphill driving ...............................................222
Traction ............................................. 272 Hook..................................................340 Traction..............................................222
Wear.................................................. 274 Tow-starting................................................205
Tire and rim sizes ....................................... 348
Tire pressure....................................... 85, 194
Tracks........................................................348
Traction......................................................222
V
Load .................................................. 193 Vehicle
Management.......................................212
Battery .............................170, 312, 325
Plate .................................................. 345 Traction systems.........................................211
Reducing................................... 296, 298
Care...................................................256
Trailer
Data bank ...........................................344
Specifications ....................................... 98 Coupling.............................................190
Identification number ...........................344
Tables................................................ 350 Hitch ..................................................190
Keys ...........................................17, 326
Warning light .......... 68, 70, 87, 97, 108 Hitching..............................................190
Laying up............................................265
Warning message ................................. 93 Unhitching ..........................................190
Lowering ............................................230
Tire pressure monitoring system .................... 85 Transmission ..............................................347
Transport ............................................28, 230
Monitoring ............................................ 92 Putting into operation ..........................313
System learning process ....................... 87 WWW.MANUALS.WS Raising ......................................229, 230
Recovery ............................................341
366 Index
Securing against rolling ....................... 287 Wheels ..............................................262, 269
Storage.............................................. 313 Adjusting ............................................277
Transport .................................... 28, 230 Change .....................................286, 293
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Washing .............................................257 Storing ...............................................278
Vehicle door Tracks................................................348
Locking ......................................... 20, 24 Wheel balancing .........................219, 277
Unlocking ............................................. 20 Windows ....................................................260
Vehicle key Windscreen wipers
Battery............................................... 326 Front ..................................................120
Vehicle-trailer combination stabilisation ......... 217 Rear...................................................121
Ventilation ................................ 126, 127, 131 Windshield ................................129, 135, 243
Vents ......................................................... 125 Windshield wiper/washer stalk .....................119
Central ...................................... 129, 135 Windshield wipers ..............................180, 246
Footwell ....................................129, 135 Blades................................................260
Side .......................................... 129, 135 Switch................................................119
Vertical coupling load .................................. 191 Winter
Voltmeter Driving ...............................................313
Battery/generator warning..................... 77 Tires ..................................................348
Wiper blades .....................................246, 260
Changing ...................................246, 248
W Working on your vehicle...............................234
Warning triangle.......................................... 175
Warnings...................................................... 83
Washer fluid
Level.................................................. 243
Topping up .........................................243
Washer system, windscreen wipers ..... 120, 121
Washing ..................................................... 257
Water crossing ........................................... 224
Weights...................................................... 352
Wheel alignment .........................................277
Wheel bolts ................................................ 285
Removing .................................. 293, 299
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Wheel change.............................................279
Index 367
Porsche and the Environment .......................... 4
Never invite car theft! .................................... 16
fusszeile-r 368
Air Cleaner ................................................. 245 fic..............................................................339
Particle Filter .............................................. 245 Towing .......................................................340
Automatic Transmission Fluid....................... 245
WWW.MANUALS.WS
Wiper Blades .............................................. 246
Vehicle Identification....................................344
Engine Data................................................346
Fuel Economy.............................................249 Transmission ..............................................347
Operating Your Porsche in other Countries ... 249 Tires, Rims, Tracks .....................................348
Fuel ........................................................... 250 ................................... Tire Pressures, Cold350
Fuel Recommendations ............................... 252 Capacities ..................................................351
Portable Fuel Containers ............................. 253 Weights......................................................352
Fuel Evaporation Control ............................. 253 Driving Performance....................................353
Emission Control System............................. 254 Dimensions.................................................354
Car Care Instructions .................................. 256 Ground Clearance .......................................355
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working on your
Vehicle....................................................... 268
Notes on Minor Repairs ............................... 269
Tires/Wheels .............................................. 269
Jack .......................................................... 283
Tool Kit ...................................................... 283
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform or Garage
lift..............................................................284
Compressor ............................................... 285
Wheel Bolts ................................................ 285
Changing Wheels ........................................ 286
Flat Tire ..................................................... 287
Electrical System........................................ 302
Battery....................................................... 312
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables....... 323
Replacing the remote control battery............ 326
Bulb Chart .................................................. 327
Replacing Bulbs .......................................... 328
Headlights.................................................. 329
Tail Light .................................................... 335
License Plate Lights .................................... 337
Headlight Adjustment .................................. 338
Changing Headlights from Left to Right-Hand Traf-
WWW.MANUALS.WS
369